« Back
Generated:
Post last updated:
if my life is hardly worth the cost
war for velgarth
Permalink Mark Unread

"- and we have four hundred, now, of the endurance necklaces for Velgarth mages," he says to Telumë. "They still don't stack well with the endurance songs but we will have to try to correct that on the song end at this point, as the song doesn't take months to distribute once we have it down." He pushes a box of jewelry across the table. "If we have six more months I'll push out another iteration but it's not a priority at present. 

Next...Telumë has looked at my math, everyone else can look at my math if they'd like, I think with the latest modifications for drawing mage-power from the Silmarils we can do the first stage of the god plan without blood power. Unfortunately then we'd have to do it in Velgarth, where there are worries it'd tip off the gods. The option remains of doing in in Arda where the doing doesn't potentially tip Sauron off; we need volunteers but we have them, and we might kill it, Gating it over, but if so we'll learn something from that, too. This also implies lower necessary casualties from later stages, probably about five percent lower for the next stage, two percent after that. We've got a couple of leads on ways to eke even more out of it, but we're not talking about much more. 

Research teams are not yet sure of all their math, though I think we're more optimistic than we were six months ago that if Sauron forces our hand it is net worthwhile to go ahead, and we're definitely more confident in the first stage."

 

He looks to Telumë. He has been extraordinarily focused and professional in every one of their interactions for the last six months and has at no point betrayed the slightest interest in whether Telumë decided to keep Maitimo alive. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë prefers to avoid thinking about Maitimo at all when he's in war-related meetings, to the extent he can, so this suits him fine. 

"Our logistics for the very rapid version are as solid as they are going to get," he says. "If Sauron forces our hand then we will be able to accomplish all of it in - seventy-two hours, if we do all of it in one go. Closer to thirty-six hours if we do the first stage now and it survives transit, since the most important checkpoints are after that stage. We have rapidly assemble-able components for a number of permanent Gates within Arda, which can be assembled by Quendi and will not require a mage to activate. The permanent terminus for the inter-world Gate will require one of us, but there is only one so that ought to be more feasible. All of the plans for transportation are in writing and I can distribute them so that the relevant people can prepare in advance." 

He glances around. "With the artifacts, I ought to have enough mages for the plan, although barely." If Sauron had moved sooner than this, they could have done it anyway, but with somewhat reduced chances of even succeeding at the last stage, and with - a lot of mages dying of backlash, probably. "If the Star-Eyed decides to approve this, we will have a number of Tayledras mages as well, who can do energy-channeling if not the parts that require more specialized training. This would offer more margin of error so I hope She does agree to it. Also I have some actual plans for how to feed a network of Heartstones into either the second stage or the last one - it would be better for the second stage but we might not have a decision from Her in time, if we end up needing to do the fast version."

Telumë hesitates for a moment before going on. "I am not fully confident on any of the god-specifications, but much more so than I was. If it were my choice alone, I think I would approve doing the first stage now, in Arda - have we checked that the Valar will not interfere? - and for going ahead with all of it if it were to become urgent." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I have not checked whether the Valar will interfere."

Permalink Mark Unread

"They wouldn't promise not to but our estimation is that it's unlikely."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Vanyel, what do you think?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I mean, what's our backup plan if they do decide to interfere? Gate it out? Hope they're too squeamish to kill something that's around as sapient as a Maia?"

Permalink Mark Unread

"A Gate would also risk making it obvious to Sauron, but significantly less so. We do frequent Gates. This one would have a larger power-flare but we could partly conceal that by using a permanent threshold with an Arda artifact powering it, and doing it behind very thorough shielding." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Is there, er, an upper limit on how long we can keep the first stage godlet in your basement? Will it get bored or something?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë chuckles despite himself. "No. It will require some much lower level of ongoing power input to keep it 'alive', if we are talking months, but the Silmarils and a handful of mages to channel them every so often ought to suffice." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"If it were my choice, I'd set up the transit plan for it just in case the Valar do object, and then do the first stage now, and hope we can do the tests in Arda because that's a lot simpler. But it's up to more people than just me." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I agree that we should do it now. Buying thirty six hours later is worth some risk of annoying the Valar and having to leave early."

Permalink Mark Unread

"I do not have very much stake in this exact part, but I agree with your considerations." 

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë glances around the room. "Then...I suppose we get ready for that. I will need to arrange to Gate over the people on my side who will be doing most of the casting." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"And you need thirty volunteers?"

Permalink Mark Unread

"Yes. Or a hundred humans, but if we know we have thirty volunteers then I would prefer that for obvious reasons." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"We think we'll have three hundred thousand, we definitely have thirty."

Permalink Mark Unread

He nods. "Thank you." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Of course. We're all busy," he says, and stands to leave.

Permalink Mark Unread

Dara exchanges a smile with Treven. Fëanáro is so cute when he does that. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë hangs back to speak to the Valdemarans. "Unless you need me for any preparations here, I will head back to Velgarth and collect my people." Which ought to take about twelve hours, they're at separate compounds and he'll only want to do one inter-world Gate.

(Which means he might be able to fit in a couple of hours in a particular beautifully-decorated room tucked away in the basement of his command centre...) 

Permalink Mark Unread

They're moving on something, he suspects as soon as he sees him. Not in a panic, or Telumë wouldn't be here - so moving on it at their own pace, because they're ready. 

 

It's terrifying. Not just because his side might lose- he has no idea what'll happen there, he still suspects that if Sauron manages to summon Melkor then it won't matter how friendly the Velgarth gods are to Telumë and his allies - but because it is, in its own right, terrifying the thing they're trying to do. It could go horribly wrong. Telumë is very conscious of it. 

And if he wanted to spend the next several hours thinking about it he'd have gone somewhere else, that's not what Maitimo's for.  He casts around for other threads of thought. "Did you write so many books because they were a useful way to catch yourself up, or to convince other people? Because I feel like you-these-days could've been much more convincing about the merits of banking."

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë sits down beside him, rests his hand on Maitimo's knee. "I think both, though informing more than convincing. I have sometimes written a book where the intent was to be very persuasive, but - that would be much more your strength, really. Usually I would simply describe a field to the best of my knowledge at the time, and other scholars could build on that if they wished. I think many did." 

Permalink Mark Unread

He leans over and kisses him. He wonders whether Telumë will kill him to build his god. He hasn't yet, obviously, but now he's in the situation of planning to kill lots of people to do it, and that makes not killing Maitimo far more marked, it's saying that some other people deserve to die instead and that's unmistakably false. "I guess it's kind of friendlier to future scholars to not set them the task of un-filtering the evidence you sent them. The way I would do it would be to have the book be very persuasive and the appendices shaped more to be accurate, so that people who want to make progress can but people who are putting less than an hour of effort into this will just get shoved in the more useful direction."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Also friendlier to my future self, I think, who has likely forgotten all about that obscure field, but who might know enough to end up being more correct about it than my past self who wrote the treatise was." Telumë leans against him. He's grown a little in the year that he's had possession of his current body; in particular, his hair is now long enough to braid, though it's wavy enough to not be entirely cooperative with this. He still undeniably looks like a teenager, though, just a somewhat less tiny one. 

"I missed you," he adds. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Missed you more. You should let me have a calendar, that says 'days since Telumë came over', and reset it when you visit, so I know whether or not I am being unreasonable missing you."

Permalink Mark Unread

"I will take that idea under consideration." Telumë is still a bit distracted, but - no, there's no point doing this if his mind is still on other things. He shifts his full attention to his husband. Considers what he wants, today, here and now. 

(To be held, reassured, to be told he's doing the right thing–)

(To talk through everything on his mind, all the considerations, get one final opinion–)

He can't have either of those things, and his mind won't quite settle on what else he wants. "So?" he says lightly. "What have you been getting up to - any new art pieces to show me?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Did you know that you have sabotaged my ability to draw buildings? I was working on something the other day and thought I'd draw Tirion and then drew this horrendous monstrosity -" he shows it. It is rather abstract. "I couldn't figure out what was wrong and tried dozens of times and then figured it must be tucked in too close with the spatial-reasoning stuff."

 

(He has noticed that his husband is distracted. Maybe because it's the last time - maybe because Telumë's deciding whether it'll be the last time - they can talk about the god, if Telumë would rather. It's not like he'll remember.)

Permalink Mark Unread

"I like it, actually! It is certainly not recognizable as Tirion, though." He runs a hand down Maitimo's back. Talking about the god isn't going to be all that helpful, Maitimo doesn't have any of the requisite background to understand the parts that are distracting him. So. Focus on the moment. Hopefully it won't be the last time, having a baby god in Arda won't trap him there permanently, but - of course, he's never sure, is he? If Sauron starts moving then there won't be time to see Maitimo.

(To say goodbye, some part of him wants to say, even though the hope is that Maitimo survives. But not this Maitimo, not exactly. He thinks that he's going to die if and when Sauron does...) 

So instead, he's going to be gratuitously self-indulgent for an hour. He leans in, whispers in Maitimo's ear even as he reaches for his braid. "I want to hear all the reasons why you love me..." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"because you are trying to build a god to kill me" is on the list, and he's not going to mention it, but otherwise he will be quite thorough. He has been learning old languages, reading old books, he knows things about Telumë that he might have forgotten about himself and he can give them back to him, in between distracted gasps and whimpers and kisses. Sometimes if he's very clever and very deft and has learned lots of interesting new things it'll look, for a few minutes in the middle, like Telumë has forgotten that they're pretending. 

Permalink Mark Unread

When the hour is over, Telumë doesn't want to leave. He never does but this time is worse. 

He kisses Maitimo's forehead. "Do you want me to sing you to sleep?" The alternative is hauling Melody in here to do it. "I will think about that calendar." And this time, maybe he won't nudge Maitimo to re-braid his hair before falling asleep; he won't remember any of this when he wakes up, but he'll know Telumë was just here. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I would like you to sing me to sleep." He studies Telumë's expression until he is pretty confident in his guess that he'll wake up. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Then he will. Learning to sing well enough in this body to get some of the Quendi magic songs to work was debatably a good use of his time, but it's easier to learn new skills when you have a helpful Mindhealer nearby. And he prefers it like this, that his last few minutes with Maitimo are holding him and singing softly, not being rudely interrupted by a third party with mind-control magic.

Once he's sure Maitimo is asleep, he disentangles himself, cautiously. Watches him for a long moment. 

Heads out. "Melody, can you redo the osanwë block, please - Nayoki will come fix the compulsions in a moment." He doesn't always set it up for Maitimo to share his thoughts, sometimes it's too distracting and he prefers not to know, but it's nice when he can avoid making Melody closely watch their sex life even if she apparently doesn't mind one way or another at this point.

Permalink Mark Unread

"I'll let him sleep a bit longer before undoing the memory block." Melody offers him a hug. "Are you all right?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

"What? Yes, fine." He looks up at her. "Why, is my relationship becoming more concerning?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

"It's exactly the same amount of concerning it's been the whole time. I know you're being careful and trying your best. Just - maybe don't see him again for at least a week, all right? You seem off-balance." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"That is not about him at all. We are about to do something objectively terrifying." Sigh. "And I will not exactly have time to see him for the next week anyway."

Permalink Mark Unread

Melody pats his shoulder. "Good skill." 

Permalink Mark Unread

And he collects all his mages and Gates them back to Vinyamar, introduces them to Fëanáro's team, makes sure they're getting settled and everyone's talking to the right other people. He excuses himself, promises to be back before they're planning to start, and heads off to Findekáno's office. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He handles Fëanáro's inability to be in a meeting room with him by passing things on to Nerdanel before or if necessary during meetings, and has been handling the logistics of arranging for Quendi volunteers.

"Telumë."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Findekáno. I wished to thank you again for all your help with this process." He switches to osanwë. Also, I will not take up too much of your time, but - the usual. I would like your advice on Maitimo, and whether I am still making a reasonable call here. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Has anything changed?

Permalink Mark Unread

Not hugely? He guessed we are beginning something. He - was thinking I might kill him for the god. Wondering if this would be the last time he ever saw me. He did not bring it up or act differently than usual, though. I found it somewhat more distressing, not being able to confide in him. I...may be less able to afford distraction, going forward. 

(He wonders how much longer they'll have at all, but there's no point trying to poke at that question more, not right now.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Do you think you can make it through to the end of the war without seeing him?

Permalink Mark Unread

It depends how long, right? I could handle a month - I have gone nearly that long before, the time I was traveling. It would be harder if he noticed my absence and was very lonely, though, since I would know all about it. And another six months feels very hard in either case. I think I could do it if I had to.

It might not be longer than that even if Sauron doesn't jar them into action sooner; once they're ready, it'll be better to start on their own terms than wait for that. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I think if it's mostly distressing you and distracting you - and there's things going on we don't want him apprised of - it might be a good time to go a month. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Nod. Melody said the same thing. ...Well, she said a week, but if everything goes smoothly I will probably be in Arda for longer than that anyway. I think that going a month would be wise. Thank you. As usual, he wants to apologize for making Findekáno of all people give him advise on the absurd and terrible state of his marriage, but he's not sure of the right words. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Good skill.

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë nods to him, and then heads back out to check on the preparations. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Maitimo wakes up. He braids his hair, gets up to eat breakfast. Tries not to miss Telumë, because if Telumë gets more missing-Telumë emotions right after he visits that's terrible incentives. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Kalira comes in! She's really delighted to see him and she found an new rare book about some entirely new-to-her species of birds in the south of the landmass! 

Permalink Mark Unread

That's really cool! Found it where?

Permalink Mark Unread

Well, technically someone else found it for her, since she's not allowed to leave given that she's friends with Telumë's evil Quendi husband. (Kalira is extremely matter-of-fact about this part, it's boring, unlike birds which are not boring at all.) She found a reference to the author's name in a different old book from Jkatha though, and then it turned out the Order of Astera had this one too. 

Permalink Mark Unread

That's so convenient!! She will have to tell him all about it.

Permalink Mark Unread

She can definitely do that! For hours! 

Permalink Mark Unread

–However, before she can get very far at all, there's the bang of a door being flung open; which never happens; they don't have any reason to move hastily around him, not anymore, they've been settled into a predictable routine for a long time now. 

:Stay where you are: Melody sends before she's even in view, gluing him to his chair. 

Permalink Mark Unread

- I didn't do it, he wants to object, but it won't be something he's done. The war, started in earnest, after - half a year, maybe, it's hard to tell in here - of course, that makes sense, two sides with piles of Foresight, both of them planning to add a god to the fray, waiting for a sign that their opponent was on the move - 

- and the only thing Maitimo can do is torture Telumë, through the bond, and he doubts he'll get to do as much as two seconds of it -

Permalink Mark Unread

He gets maybe a second and a half, because Melody is moving fast and he can't move, and the instant she touches him, he's unconscious.

She catches him as he goes limp. Looks apologetically at Kalira. "I'm very sorry to interrupt your conversation, but we had something urgent come up. I think probably you're going to be off duty for the rest of the week. We can get you more books." 

Permalink Mark Unread

Kalira bobs her head. She looks a bit irritated, not especially worried. She's shy around most people, but she knows Melody by now. "Do you, um, want help carrying him to the bed? I can help. I'm pretty strong." 

Permalink Mark Unread

And a world away, Telumë's first warning, before anything else happens, is a second-and-a-half burst of distant agony.

Fortunately he's not in the middle of anything important; they finished the first stage an hour ago. About eighteen hours since their departure from Velgarth. It went smoothly, which it should have, every single part of this has been drilled a thousand times. Thirty Noldor volunteers are dead and there is a tiny baby god anchored to a quartz focus, for later transport. A couple of his mages and some of Fëanáro's people are poking it and 'talking' to it right now. There are still a lot of things to check, but the initial aspects look good. 

–and he doesn't know for sure, yet, but he suspects they've just run out of time. 

Vanyel's gone out to collapse in a heap and sleep a bit, and Telumë can't contact him or any of the Valdemaran leadership directly because he doesn't have Mindspeech. He isn't sure what Fëanáro is doing but probably he's better not interrupted, at least not until they have actual confirmation. Which, if he's right, will be arriving any second, but any amount of extra warning...

Nerdanel? 

Permalink Mark Unread

Yes?

Permalink Mark Unread

I expect to receive confirmation soon, but - I think it very likely we just moved to active war. Alert all the key people, except maybe Fëanáro if he is not at a good moment to be interrupted, that can wait for the official message. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Mmm, she says distractedly back, presumably because she's doing that.

Permalink Mark Unread

Official word reaches him via his communications artifact a minute and thirty seconds later. <The city of Leverand in Rethwellan was just destroyed. We assume Sauron. Population of twenty-five thousand. He is moving now>

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë relays this. Takes a moment just to breathe. <Maitimo?>

Permalink Mark Unread

<Unconscious. We will keep him that way for - however long it takes>

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë hesitates, and then shrugs and relays this fact to Nerdanel as well. She arguably has a right to stay in the loop on this matter. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Thank you. He couldn't have known, right -

Permalink Mark Unread

I cannot think how he could have known before we did. I - assume he guessed in the last few seconds, probably because someone arrived in a hurry to knock him out and that would be unusual. He spent about two seconds torturing me through the bond, which he would only do if he knew what was happening. Sigh. He is in the safest place he can be, for this. It - will not be very much longer. One way or another. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Mmhmm.

They've been scouting for other habitable worlds, in case they lose, but found nothing. There's Valinor, though not for Telumë and not for Maitimo.

Permalink Mark Unread

Vanyel catches up. He looks exhausted but he's on his feet. "Gods. What timing. How did they know - we did it all here...?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Vkandis has god-Foresight. I imagine there were ripples - He did not know Sauron's plan, of course, but if He told Sauron we were making a move on something very soon..." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I need to get to Velgarth and pay a call to the Shadow-Lover." He's too tired to Gate. So is Telumë. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I can Gate." Jisa catches up. She hasn't been back to the north since certain past events there, but now really isn't the time to complain about that. 

Permalink Mark Unread

And Dara and Treven can help coordinate the other various pieces here in Arda. They're both taking it pretty calmly. It's not like it's really a surprise. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I ought go with you to Velgarth," Karis tells Vanyel. "I am not sure if there is a temple to Vkandis I can easily reach, but if I petition Him and warn Him what Sauron is actually about to do..." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I mean, I guess it's worth a try." 

Permalink Mark Unread

The Noldor get an announcement. Sauron has figured out how to try to summon Melkor back from the Void into Velgarth, from which they mean to conquer both worlds. (They do not actually have specific intelligence on this, but it seems like a safe bet.) The allied governments of the Noldor and of Velgarth have been planning for this moment, but in order to do it they need a lot of volunteers. To die, in order to fuel the spell that will bring a new good god into the world and stop Melkor. Mandos is supportive and there are plans in place to ensure everyone's return to life goes very smoothly. 

 

The Gates are at the following locations. If you have questions, don't ask him please ask one of these sixty other people depending on your date of birth. 

 

Permalink Mark Unread

The teams double-checking the god plans take a vote every week, lately. If Sauron attacks now, should we go ahead? The vote has come out "yes" for two months but it's still a narrower "yes" than you'd like. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ten minutes after the official warning, Vanyel is in Velgarth, courtesy of Jisa. Ten minutes after that he's in a bed with a couple of Telumë's Healers attending him. Stopping his heart on purpose only hours after channeling massive amount of power to a godlet is not the smartest plan in the world, but it's the one he has.

Permalink Mark Unread

Stef is with him, this time. He should probably lie down or something. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Vanyel doesn't hesitate. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Herald Vanyel." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Sauron is starting." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"We suspected. We will try to delay him. The Star-Eyed will attempt to negotiate with Vkandis but this is not quick as mortals reckon it." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"We know that too. Karis will try to speak to Him directly. I have no idea if that would be faster, but..." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"The actions of mortals generally are." 

Permalink Mark Unread

Vanyel nods. "...Do you See anything ahead, now? Does it look like–" he bites his lip, "–does it look like we'll succeed?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

The Shadow-Lover doesn't answer. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Well, can you offer us any other help?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

And twenty-five minutes after the official message, as soon as Vanyel is sort of awake and coherent enough to get out some words, Jisa contacts one of Findekáno's staff in Arda; he's presumably very busy right now and probably Nerdanel is quite overwhelmed as well. 

<We need to get Fëanáro's math teams to Velgarth as soon as possible. Mandos has...offered us a very weird favour>

Permalink Mark Unread

The math teams? Uh, okay. I'll tell them.

Permalink Mark Unread

Jisa waits for that to be passed on so people can start getting organized. Probably she should explain a bit more. She's kind of frazzled. <When Vanyel talks to the Shadow-Lover, he gets a sort of extreme time-dilation effect, he can experience hours or days in a couple of seconds. With Mandos helping, the Shadow-Lover can do that for an arbitrary number of our people, well, up to several hundred but I think it's fewer than that? Buy us more time for checking everything over. It, um, technically involves a brief near-death experience but it's pretty safe> 

Permalink Mark Unread

- so they can have another couple of years or whatever -

Permalink Mark Unread

<That's the idea>

Permalink Mark Unread

This is passed along. The mathematicians are incredibly delighted about it. ...are there any mages left who aren't too tired to Gate them.

Permalink Mark Unread

They decided to add some redundancy by training more of Telumë's mages on inter-world Gates. One of them can do it as soon as everyone's ready. Is Fëanáro coming too? 

Permalink Mark Unread

Then a hundred Quendi or so can be ushered through this Gate into Velgarth.

 

Velgarth is very ugly but they're supposed to be nearly dying, apparently?

Permalink Mark Unread

Vanyel is busy trying to convey a detailed enough sense-impression of Mandos' current location in Jkatha to one of Telumë's people. He's very relieved that there are people with osanwë arriving and he can ask one of them to just bounce it for him, osanwë is much better at that and he isn't concentrating at his best right now. 

Permalink Mark Unread

They don't really have room to comfortably fit a hundred Quendi in here, but they can manage temporarily and maybe Gate them elsewhere afterward, though non-exhausted mages are going to be in short supply for the next few days. 

Less than an hour after the announcement, all of the Quendi math researchers have rooms they can lie down comfortably in, if not actual beds, and Mandos is being Gated in. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Mandos will make all of the Quendi in Telumë's facilities allllllllmost die and then, with the Shadow-Lover, he will keep them that way. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë isn't delighted about taking part in something that requires a god's help and where if said god decides not to cooperate he might die, but the Shadowgod seems very firmly on their side, at this point, and the offer is open to humans as well, though it's probably a bit more dangerous for them so only a dozen of his staff and Telumë himself participate, to answer questions. The time-dilation effect can be varied in separate pockets of the Shadow-Lover's space, which makes sense, the Shadow-Lover has to handle all the dying people in the Shadowgod's regions. So he can bounce around answering questions as they come up, and hopefully spend a lot less than several subjective years there.

A number of Healers have just been Gated in from elsewhere. The Shadow-Lover ought to be able to send people back but can't do the almost-killing them himself. Telumë has Healing, though, he doesn't need assistance with that part. 

Permalink Mark Unread

And suddenly about a hundred Quendi and a dozen humans are in a formless white place. 

"Welcome. You may stay here as long as you wish. If you walk a short distance, you will end up in your own region which will be disconnected from the others, but you can find them again if you wish. I apologize that it was not possible to bring your existing notes here, but you can recreate writing supplies in this way..." 

Permalink Mark Unread

- huh. 

 

He should walk a short distance before people orient themselves and figure out who all is here.

Permalink Mark Unread

wash of surprise - 

Telumë should not be feeling anything at all through the marriage bond, for one Maitimo is unconscious and two, Telumë himself should currently be mostly-outside-of-time and Maitimo should not be. Meaning something went...unexpectedly. Or expectedly, in hindsight, this particular piece of context wouldn't have been obvious to Mandos but it's not like they've been going around advertising to the Quendi researchers that the currently-evil Prince of the Noldor is stashed in the basement here, somebody obviously forgot. 

Well, this place works something like Lórien's garden, he thinks; start walking, find what he's expecting to find. He expects to find Maitimo.

...He feels very calm about it. For the first time in over a year, nothing hurts. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He finds Maitimo. Maitimo's walking away from the rest of the group, still surprised, and confused -

 

 

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë follows him a bit further, until the rest of the group is no longer visible or audible and they seem to be in their own small white world. 

"Fancy seeing you here," he says. It comes out kind of flirtatious despite his best efforts. He only ever sees Maitimo in one context, nowadays, and it's not 'wearing his professional face'. 

Permalink Mark Unread

" - Telumë." He tilts his head, looking at him. "I take it this isn't Mandos. I was going to be very impressed, if it was, this is - better than advertised."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Well, Mandos is technically responsible for your being here, I think, in collaboration with a Velgarth god." He has no idea whether Maitimo will remember this or not, but either way he should go back to being unconscious as soon as it's done, and then - everything will be over one way or another inside of a week - so it's almost like they can speak openly again. "Why, what was advertised about Mandos?"

Permalink Mark Unread

"No one mentioned you feel better, or think better. I guess they often don't remember it very clearly. I was so afraid of it - but mostly, I guess, not for reasons that had much to do with what the Halls are like."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Well, this is a temporary effect and I do not think Mandos has any reason to single you out there, although," he pauses. Expects the Shadow-Lover to appear and talk to him. Hopefully that works? (The Shadow-Lover isn't a single entity in quite the same way that a person would be; he's a...function, a small sub-part of a larger god with a particular purpose, sort of like a Maia but also a bit more abstract than that - it's hard to explain how Velgarth gods work to anyone who isn't a specialist.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Yes, Telumë?" The Shadow-Lover appears as a tall man dressed in white, but not Herald's Whites exactly. He has long red hair. His face is in shadow but somehow his eyes are still visible, piercing blue, kind and sorrowful at the same time. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He had forgotten the part where supposedly the Shadow-Lover appears to mortals with the sex and appearance they would find attractive (honestly, why, it seems so unnecessary, but so does a death god being called the 'Shadow-Lover', really.) 

"We need our own bubble for a while," he says, "and - at some point I need to go talk to the others, but he needs to not do that, he wasn't supposed to be here in the first place, we communicated poorly."

He wonders, vaguely, how the Shadow-Lover appears to Maitimo. 

Permalink Mark Unread

More like original-Leareth than like Telumë, which seems like something to not share. 

 

"If you have made a mistake with your god I actually prefer you catch it here," he says mildly. "I don't mean to interfere with them."

Permalink Mark Unread

He smiles, gently. "I know. I am just very paranoid, you know that. ...I was not expecting you to be here, obviously, but I think I am glad? I had not thought we would have an opportunity to speak again, and - in a place where neither of us is hurting..." 

Permalink Mark Unread

 

"- are you planning to kill me, then?"

Permalink Mark Unread

"No. Currently we are accepting Noldor volunteers, but you obviously did not volunteer. And of course we are hoping to win, and...it would be harder to fix the Maitimo who would exist after that, if you spent a long time with Mandos first. Also I am, perhaps, being a little selfish here." 

Permalink Mark Unread

He nods. "Then probably we will speak again. Though one way or another it is likely to hurt a lot."

Permalink Mark Unread

"...I suppose it is difficult to envision the future after the war ends, whichever way it goes. But, yes, there will be one." He looks down. "I am not sure if you will even remember this, later, but - I am so sorry. About everything." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I know."

Permalink Mark Unread

"I want..." He has no idea what he wants. For it to be over. For none of it to have happened in the first place. To just be with Maitimo and have it not be so goddamned complicated. "I want you to hold me. Just for a little while." 

Permalink Mark Unread

He takes a step back, crosses his arms. " - sorry. I'm not angry with you.

But I think - regardless of who wins - I would like to get ...back in the habit of thinking about that. Can I think for a few minutes -"

Permalink Mark Unread

He's...relieved? Pleased. "...Yes, of course, I should have asked it that way." He sits down on a nearby white-fog-chair-thing. Waits. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"You can come here," he says, a few minutes later.

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë gets up. Goes to him. 

...For some reason he's crying. It doesn't hurt, whatever emotion he's feeling, which makes it hard to tell what the emotion even is. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He pulls him into his lap. "It is probably a waste of effort to figure out what want, since it will depend on who wins this war and I am satisfied enough with my plans for either case. I am glad to be alive for it."

Permalink Mark Unread

"You might as well stay and - do some thinking," Telumë suggests. "Since we have this space anyway, and you are going to go back to being unconscious afterward and will probably not wake up until the war is over one way or another. ...If my side loses then I assume I will not be alive in the aftermath, but I do still come back."

He's going to stay for a while for some cuddling, and then go out and be useful and tell the Shadow-Lover to please not let Maitimo find him by accident again. He feels very weird about having sex in front of a god-avatar so probably they shouldn't. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"You do!" he says cheerfully. "The first time a descendent uses a fire spell. Sauron thinks Melkor can set up something for surveillance of magic like he was doing in Valdemar, but bigger, and I can catch you at it." Petpet. "I am planning to give you a planet, which is the best wedding present in all of history if you think about it."

Permalink Mark Unread

Snuggle. "Probably!" It's quite romantic actually even if it really shouldn't be given the context. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"No one has ever given their husband a planet before and probably no one will ever do so again because we will abolish the institution of marriage."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Oh, why? Not sufficiently conducive to suffering?" This is such a weird conversation to be having. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"It's Eru's! Remember, I hate everything to do with Eru even when suffering actually has nothing to do with it. Eru is a horrible meddling idiot and should stop. - he's the reason I got sent to you again, you know, I don't know if anyone told you."

Permalink Mark Unread

"I do not think anybody told me specifically but I am not at all surprised." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"After the revelation that you all were totally planning to use the Silmarils to kill tons of people my father asked if it was my fault and I said that it was and he punched me in the face and the Valar - panicked - barely remembered while trying to make everyone stop doing things that if they left no precautions I would just walk over and kill Vanyel - asked Eru for help - and then I was back in your cage."

Permalink Mark Unread

"...I did have the thought when it happened that obviously the gods hated me very much and were laughing. The Valar continue to remind me of - oh, if one took a group of human six-year-olds and elevated them to godhood. They are not ill-intentioned - usually - but they are so bumbling." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"It is probably very hard to rule beings who are fundamentally a completely different kind of thing than you! Now that I've met Velgarth's gods I'm impressed they at least talk! With words!"

Permalink Mark Unread

"Have you personally met Vkandis? I tried to speak with him in the past and failed, on at least one occasion via being set on fire." What a thing to find in your own notes on previous lives. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I've given reports to people he was possessing. They weren't any good at formulating questions. And I've seen him interact with Sauron, which seemed to work better for both of them - I think that was Sauron's main advantage in negotiating, he could actually talk to Vkandis at all -

Also the Iftel communications people seemed terrified of me out of all proportion to how scary I was trying to be so maybe they do frequently get lit on fire for delivering bad news.

such a dumb way to run an evil empire, lighting people on fire for delivering bad news."

Permalink Mark Unread

"You would think so, right? Also, you are in fact very scary." He says it while smiling slightly. "Perhaps they were simply accurately recognizing this." Exactly like everyone in Arda failed to until afterward. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Oh, I killed people for causing bad news. Killed their families, sometimes, if it seemed like they'd understood their incentives to not be sufficient and would've done better with stronger motivation, though that wasn't actually anywhere near the most common cause of bad decisions. ...And I wanted our mages to be scared enough of me they'd rather do the suicide fireball, which they were really bad at noticing it was the moment to do. But it's just wasting my time if priests end up scared to deliver bad news that's not their fault.

- there's some we'll have to get back. If you win."

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë nods. "Well, if we win, we will have the help of several gods with that. And, yes, most people are not going to be good at making the call of when to Final Strike. It is not as though this is a habit one could practice that well in advance..." 

They can talk for a while. The conversation can't really be uncomfortable even if the content is, not here. For now, Telumë can accept that as a gift he'd never expected to receive. 

"...I ought to go," he says finally, reluctantly, as he disentangles himself. "But - stay longer, if you wish. I love you." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I love you."

Permalink Mark Unread

And Telumë walks back out into the Shadow-Lover's realm, expecting to find anybody who has questions for him.

Permalink Mark Unread

Interdimensional permanent Gate-terminals are completed and Almarë and Ertuon walk through holding hands. 

I think it's a lot better than dying fighting in a war, she says. Because that's probably traumatizing, what with the violence, and you might've killed some people, and even if that's not your fault it's got to affect you, right?

But if you go off to die fighting you might not die, he says, which is a lot less scary than definitely dying. There's the sense that if you're clever enough, if you're brave enough - 

They don't stop walking - they've been told not to stop walking - but they slow down the slightest bit to gawk at their surroundings. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Their surroundings are shockingly ugly! They're on a flat plain, tundra stretching out as far as the eye can see in one direction; in the other direction, snowcapped mountains are visible, those are quite pretty. There are canvas tents and hastily constructed buildings or at least roofs with cloth walls that whip in the wind. It's cold. There's snow on the ground, in between patches of frozen brown mud. 

A number of humans at fold-out tables are handing out very makeshift warm clothing from crates, and maps of the camp, and pointing the arriving volunteers at where to go. 

A human woman, looking tired and harried, apologizes to them for the unsightly surroundings. They're not needed quite yet but it won't be a long stay here, less than a day probably. Unfortunately there is not really food for them right now, or anywhere to sleep. 

Permalink Mark Unread

They raise their eyebrows at each other and start singing; other people, walking through the Gate behind them, join in. The song is mostly just to lift their moods but it will help with the cold, a bit, too. Once they have decent numbers they can melt the nearby snow. 

Okay, Almarë says, I guess probably this is moderately traumatizing. - the way King Fëanáro was rumored to have originally been planning it - you wouldn't even know -

- yes, Ertuon says, but also, what if someone was pregnant even though we'd been told not to. Or had a pet bird who'd starve if they were gone for a week. Or - probably you don't want kids - 

Presumably if it was bad for kids they would've said they couldn't volunteer, and they didn't say that. Though they might not have known it would be ugly.

I think war is always ugly. 

 

One of the Quendi volunteers starts directing the singers to work on flowers; by the time there are thousands of Quendi there are buds poking their heads out of the soil. And being promptly trampled because this is a lot of people. 

Permalink Mark Unread

There are pretty detailed plans for this but also everything is being done so fast. Some Velgarth mages Gate in. Then more of them. 

Some of them have long white hair in braids and are wearing clothing that's almost pretty enough to go unnoticed in Arda. They gather in a circle and start doing some sort of magic, and then the wind cuts off as a giant barrier appears around the rapidly-erected camp. 

One of the human logistics staff is explaining to some people that they're Tayledras, which is good, it means the Star-Eyed Goddess must have elected to help after all now that they know how dire things are. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Should we be coordinating with them on magic? I don't think ours will interfere but we won't do weather if they've got that covered, that sort of thing, says the Quendi who is coordinating the singers on turning this camp into a meadow of waist-high wildflowers.

Permalink Mark Unread

"Oh, that's a good idea actually! We didn't know we'd have them until the last minute so they aren't as well in on the planning - I think that person is coordinating..." 

Permalink Mark Unread

So the singer wanders over to confirm that the field of wildflowers is fine, and is there anything else that'd be more useful?

Permalink Mark Unread

The person is tall and looks fairly young as humans go and also kind of sad. He answers in Velgarth Mindspeech; he doesn't share a language with them. :The flowers are not a problem, no. What else does your magic do?: 

Permalink Mark Unread

The songs we can do on short notice mostly do healing, and plant growth, and decoration, and weather. There are some ones for hand-to-hand fighting but I hope there's not going to be any of that, some people brought children. 

Permalink Mark Unread

:No. We are a very long way from the fighting: He looks sad again. :Nobody is hurt now, although if healing helps with tiredness, some of the mages are going to be tired from traveling here. Other than that - if plants and decorations will help your people, do that: 

Permalink Mark Unread

Some people know a song for Velgarth-mage exhaustion and can hang around doing that; most of them will focus, though, on the decorations. Once the Crown Prince Macalaurë arrives this work goes quicker, not particularly because he is a fantastic singer (though he is) but because he has a natural advantage at getting everyone to go along with his choice of songs. 

 

Permalink Mark Unread

By the time they are ready, the camp is full of waist-high wildflowers and butterflies and lightning bugs, blinking overhead. The Quendi are singing some extremely complicated beautiful song that has no magical effects but is, non-magically, keeping everyone cheerful and distracted. 

 

Whenever you're ready -

Permalink Mark Unread

Terse messages are passed back and forth along the communication-artifacts. 

Telumë is on the Arda side, in front of a crystal large enough that it's going to need a cart to wheel it across. It's glowing. 

He's been talking to it. Talking to an infant god is pretty disorienting, even if this one is almost entirely cut off from the Foresight machinery of Velgarth. Which is arguably an advantage of having birthed it in Arda. 

It communicates via something vaguely like osanwë, which is neat, he and his people wouldn't have been able to build that in before meeting the Noldor. 

We are ready, he tells it, not quite in words. Are you? 

Permalink Mark Unread

What he gets in response is a mostly-wordless, indescribable flood of information. 

Ready?

Permalink Mark Unread

It's more like talking to a Heartstone than a person, or perhaps a very weird Maia, which is accurate. The godlet doesn't particularly have a sense of self, the way a human would; the patterns and scaffolding built into it are drawing the outlines of something much, much bigger. That outline is exactly the shape it should be, they've checked everything, and he's a lot more confident in those checks given that Fëanáro's teams reached the point of actually being confident in all of his work. Thirteen hours since the ball dropped - a little ahead of schedule, actually, but both the logistics of moving volunteers and the checks here went flawlessly. 

Telumë is, nonetheless, very scared. This is arguably the most dangerous part of the entire process, filling out those empty outlines as though turning an architectural sketch into a palace, bringing the godlet from small and incomplete and mostly blind, to - well, it will be a god, basically, after this. Just a very tiny one, that wouldn't stand a chance against the other gods of Velgarth if it came to a direct fight with all of them. 

After stage two, maybe twenty-four hours to go. Twelve hours of franticly verifying that everything in the scaffolding held up; if they got it right, and they really should have, the god will be utterly cooperative with all of this. And then - well, however long it takes to get the power they need for the rest. They just received confirmation that they'll have access to the Heartstones. That's less than half of what they need, though. The rest... Well, they're going to be fighting Sauron and possibly Vkandis directly, depending on how His upcoming talk with Karis goes, to murder the populations of several countries before Sauron can.

(Telumë's past and future selves can take responsibility for having emotions about that part. Right now, he doesn't have time. They can get the people back, eventually, and that's a problem for after the war.) 

"Ready," he tells Vanyel, standing.

Permalink Mark Unread

Vkandis is angry. He's basically blind now - all the Velgarth gods must be - and his sources of information have no idea what they're talking about. They don't know how their enemies started flattening cities in Rethwellan. They don't know if they're going to be able to keep doing it. They don't know what their enemies want the power for. 

He's nearly halfway there.

He can't count on it lasting. Vkandis isn't stupid, and it would only take a few pieces of bad luck for him to realize what must be happening. It had better be too late by the time that happens. The plan was to keep picking off small towns, if the local gods seemed too shocked to react at all, but to go for bigger ones, if they looked like they might be pulling themselves together to make a real fight out of it. 

He heads towards Petras. He'll show up, to mage-sight, as a blur, racing faster than even a Companion. If people aren't stupid they'll be fleeing the city, trying to spread out, trying to minimize how many can be taken in one explosion that will by now have abandoned the semblance of a mage's Final Strike. But people are stupid so maybe they'll be sitting nicely at home, waiting, gossiping about the first and fastest-moving batch of rumors that their world is back at war. 

Two hundred fifty thousand more, off Petras and the little villages he'll swallow up on his way there, and then he will have enough.

Permalink Mark Unread

Petras is not Vkandis' territory. Rethwellan is under the remit of a different god. One who almost never speaks directly to mortals. One who works at an even greater remove than most of the Velgarth deities. 

(Shadow-Lover, never seen by day, the popular Valdemaran song goes, only deep in dreams do you appear–)

Vkandis is - not exactly subtle, as deities go, but the mostly-nameless god of Valdemar and Rethwellan and partially of Hardorn is

Permalink Mark Unread

And Rethwellan borders on the Pelagirs, the domain of another deity. Not one who has generally been allied with the nameless Valdemaran god who works in mist and shadows, but - times have changed. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He arrives in Petras. He circles the city, setting out the boundaries of what he'll do, leaving traces that are visible to Velgarth mage-sight - not that they'll have enough time to do anything about it. He observes no opposition. The local gods are blind, and stupid, and useless.

 

 

He circles the city again. He takes it up in flames, the buildings and the fields and the streets and the people, two hundred thousand of them, enough for -

Permalink Mark Unread

- not enough for anything, actually. 

They are his people, his souls, almost two hundred thousand of them when you include Petras itself and the outlying nearby towns that were struck in the last seconds and minutes. The Shadow-Lover is going to be very busy for the next little while, which is fine, he's built for that - usually not so many at once...

(The Shadow-Lover takes them in, with a gentle hand and a sorrowful smile, in two hundred thousand simultaneous instants outside of time, and he holds onto everything, memories, hopes and dreams and disappointments - it won't be quite as thorough as Quendi resurrection but it turns out that the fundamental limitations on how much can be saved in the Velgarth afterlife were much further out than it's always appeared, especially if it won't be for very long on the timescales gods count things, and Mandos has been very helpful.)

- they are his people and his souls and that means the power released by their deaths, as the bonds holding bodies and spirits together are torn apart, is - something he has a claim to, in some sense, and -

Permalink Mark Unread

And in a single timeless instant, two entities that are most senses closer to forces of nature than people, will metaphorically reach out and link hands. 

–and the blood-power that should have been released into Sauron's hands, from two hundred thousand deaths, is instead gone.

Permalink Mark Unread

In a place outside time, a little girl is crying in a white place, she's confused, her mama isn't here, and - 

- and a figure in white, with hair the same mahogany shade as her mama, kneels in front of her, bringing his head level with hers. Sorrowful blue eyes look out from a face hidden in shadows.

The figure holds out his hand. "I am sorry."

Permalink Mark Unread

About forty Rethwellani mages sensed something, and - well, the rumours haven't made a lot of sense so far, but when there are rumours flying that your country is being destroyed one city at a time in fiery conflagrations, and then something baffling appears in your mage-sight, possibly the wise thing to do is to get out while you still can. A dozen Gates spring up, to anywhere they can think of - it might not be far enough, most of the mages don't have Gate-locations outside of Rethwellan– 

Permalink Mark Unread

Their Gates do not end up at all where they expected. 

Permalink Mark Unread

 

 

....what. 

 

 

If they can do that everywhere, every time, he has a problem, but he should try some more cities - Vkandis's cities, maybe, since whatever that was it wasn't Vkandis -

 

He heads for Karse.

Permalink Mark Unread

Karis, the Queen-in-exile and supposedly rightful holder of the throne in Karse (though it is unclear if Vkandis still agrees), tumbles through the Gate. Vanyel's Gate - he's the only mage still alive who's even been to Sunhame - it's not ideal for him to Gate right before what's about to happen in the north, but he has one of the endurance artifacts, they're being distributed right now, and - and if they don't get Vkandis on their side again, they are probably going to run out of time and lose after all. 

She has to hope that Sauron isn't here - that the priests don't have orders to kill her on sight and if they do they'll hesitate - has to hope that she has five minutes to do what she needs to do–

The temple is ahead. Gilded everything reflects the midmorning sunlight into her eyes - it's like stepping into a furnace... 

She tumbles to her knees in front of the altar. 

Prays, a prayer she has never said in earnest before. Vkandis, my Sunlord, I call on your aid and your mercy...

She's afraid, but she sets that aside. Makes herself an empty vessel. She knows what it feels like, to have a god fill her–

Permalink Mark Unread

Yes, daughter?

Permalink Mark Unread

...Honestly, she didn't expect this to work. 

There's no time to explain in words. She's an imperfect container filled with the light of a thousand suns and all of her belongs to her god - always has, even when He had turned away from her - and so she holds it up, everything that's happened, everything that they've learned...

Permalink Mark Unread

I see. 

Permalink Mark Unread

And he holds onto her, which is fine - this is her only mission, here, she isn't actually expecting to survive it, isn't expecting to see any of the others again. 

(She wishes there had been time to say goodbye to Vanyel. Wonders if she's going to see Randale again, but they belong to different gods, if he belongs to any god at all...) 

(She wonders, desperately, if there'll be time to see her daughter again. Arven will be eight by now. She's probably grown. Is she scared. Does she know what's happening?) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Sauron reaches Karse and can't get in. He tries impatiently, for a few wasted seconds, to cancel the magic at the border. He can't. It's like Iftel's. The plan had been to destroy them with agents seeded internally, because once Vkandis realized he'd been betrayed they would be unable to get in. 

 

He tells those agents to move anyway, because why not, but he won't get any power off it -

Permalink Mark Unread

An elderly man in the simple robes of a local village priest steps across the barrier. 

His eyes are glowing. 

What are you doing, Vkandis Sunlord speaks through the mortal's lips. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ugh do they really need to talk about it -

Betraying your world to eternal torture and suffering. The alliance can only stretch so far, and will have its breaking points. He only needs two hundred thousand more. He can shatter villages as he goes, see what works and what doesn't, map out the boundaries of the alliance against him - 

Permalink Mark Unread

A deity of Velgarth looks out at him through the man's eyes. Seems to be thinking. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Karis is still kneeling. It's starting to hurt.

Permalink Mark Unread

My daughter. What should I say to him? A question not quite in words. Vkandis Sunlord isn't very good at words. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Wow. That's - all right, hmm, what should Vkandis say to Sauron? 

I am not sure. Tell him 'good luck with that'?

Permalink Mark Unread

Good luck with that, Vkandis says to Sauron. 

Permalink Mark Unread

And then the man is blazing, overflowing with divine light, too much for a fragile mortal form to hold for longer than fraction of a second - 

- and a crack opens in the fabric of the world, below and around and inside of where Sauron's disembodied magical shape is floating. Vkandis has a particular connection to the Elemental Plane of Fire. 

(It won't last long, of course. Sauron is a Maia and he knows how to navigate between worlds, he'll find his way back. But it will buy them a little bit of time.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

- in between snarling frustratedly at Vkandis he pays attention, he can find the ways between planes now but he has to recognize them -

 

 

And then everything is spectacularly on fire. It's really a very good concept for a plane, he should emulate it, but he has to get back, first - no inconveniences will matter once Melkor is returned from the Void -

Permalink Mark Unread

These are not all of the agents he sent, only the ones who were in place six months ago, Karis is thinking to Vkandis; she's given Him access to everything she knows but she ought to at least help him to prioritize. They may know the names of others...

And she starts listing off names to her god. 

Permalink Mark Unread

All over Karse, various Sunpriests are suddenly having extremely specific premonitions. Literal brief Foresight visions, in some cases. Also some miraculous powers, even for the ones who aren't mages. 

(Vkandis can't keep this up. The gods of Velgarth aren't infinitely powerful, and shield-walling an entire country plus all of the rest will cost Him. But there's no point saving up for anything past the finish line, which they may or may not still reach.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

And in Iftel, a long way away, the High Priest, their Son of the Sun, has a vision of his own. 

- he wakes up on the floor, disoriented, but only for a moment. 

"We need–" he coughs, clears his throat, sits up with the aid of his very worried assistant. "Pass word. We need Gates to Valdemar. There is - war - betrayal - we need to evacuate them now." 

Permalink Mark Unread

:We're ready: Vanyel tells Macalaurë. :Telumë is coming across now: 

Things are happening. He doesn't really know anything more specific than 'things are happening'. He can't worry about it; he's done his part for the war raging south of here, dropping Karis off, and now he has to focus, the next four to six hours are going to be critical. 

Permalink Mark Unread

There are three hundred twelve thousand Quendi volunteers. Enough for the second stage, comfortably; nowhere near enough for the third. Valdemar and Karse might be enough for the third. Valdemar and Karse and Rethwellan and Hardorn - 

- they've told all the Quendi that Mandos is supportive of this plan, and he's supportive of the second part, but privately Macalaurë is not sure that anyone involved in planning the third will be coming back any time soon. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë is terrified, but the time for hesitation is long past. 

His mages who were still in Arda cross ahead of him, two dozen people, immediately fanning out and falling into position. For some reason everyone has decided that it is 'symbolically' 'appropriate' or something for him to wheel the physical focus holding his baby god across, even though it really doesn't matter who does it. 

He is really badly hoping it makes it across intact. It should, they've got a much better idea of it now - and if they have to start over with stage one, they can just follow exactly the same process and dispense with most of the checks–

He crosses the Gate into Velgarth, stepping into a field of flowers that feels oddly thematically apppropriate for trying to build a god that will stand up for the flourishing of all people everywhere. Quendi are good at flourishing, after all, especially the ones who grew up in paradise. 

Permalink Mark Unread

The Valdemaran government is already here. Dara sits in Rolan's saddle, well back. Rolan is actually pretty helpful to have around for this part; he has an eidetic memory and can Mindspeak a hundred people at once and help coordinate the exact correct rate of power release for the mages they have to get this done as fast as possible. 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Telumë, are you ready?: 

Permalink Mark Unread

Not having Mindspeech has never been more inconvenient. Ready, Telumë thinks loudly as he disactivates the Gate behind him and dismantles it by dint of knocking the pieces apart. Throwing around a lot of magic near an active inter-world Gate is a bad idea. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Deep breath. He's so scared, but Vanyel passed the point of ever hesitating because of fear a decade ago. 

:Macalaurë, first block now: 

(It's really very convenient that Quendi can suicide on purpose, really, it makes this a lot less...messy.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Almarë squeezes Ertuon's hand. Makes her heart stop. It's weird, she's thinking, yesterday almost no one had ever died, in all of history, and tomorrow most people will have died, something they'll all have had in common - Mandos won't be angry, they said Mandos won't be angry, but it still feels like something you might need some time, to put yourself back together from...it feels right now like they might need a lot of time actually -

Permalink Mark Unread

And four hundred Velgarth mages equipped with endurance artifacts channel the energy released into the empty container waiting to be filled. 

It's going to take a while. 

Permalink Mark Unread

There's no room for fear anymore. But there's plenty of space left for grief. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Natti clings to her mother's hand as they sprint through the streets of Haven. "Mama mama where are we going–"

"I don't know!" her mother admits, in between panting for air. "Somewhere safe." 

...Natti's getting tired. She just turned five and she's a big girl now but her legs still aren't long enough to keep up and her heart is pounding out of her chest with exertion and terror. "Mama I can't..."

So her mother scoops her up and runs. There's a glowy magic Gate ahead. Most of the Gates before now meant that bad things were about to happen, but this one isn't at a Temple to Vkandis and maybe it's different. 

There's a funny-looking man with long white hair standing on the other side of it, in a very funny-looking forest, the trees aren't normal trees at all... 

Some of the Valdemarans are hesitating, but Natti's mother doesn't. She dives across the threshold. 

...Elsewhere in Haven, and every other city and town in both Valdemar and Rethwellan with a population above ten thousand, Gates are springing up. (They have lots of extremely disoriented Rethwellani mages near k'Treva Vale, some of whom are finding their balance fast enough to help with this.) 

In towns and villages too small to justify a Gate, village priests and wise-women and anyone with the slightest connection to even a minor local deity is suddenly getting VERY LOUD PREMONITIONS. They need to run. Scatter into the countryside, spread out - along the river if they can, water will both move them quickly and slow down magic. 

The gods are at war. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Sauron comes back, along with the hundred-feet-or-so of whatever was nearest to him. This causes a forest fire, which doesn't advance his goals but certainly suits his mood. He moves faster. There's no cities to circle, he can kill people as he passes them but that won't get him to two hundred thousand in time - he can, and probably should, head out of these gods' territory altogether, really - he reaches out for the minds of his agents who are mages, to demand a Gate - 

Permalink Mark Unread

He's going to have to reach pretty damned far to find one of them who's still alive. Under ordinary circumstances it would be pretty hard for locals to kill mages, but when random god-coincidences and flickers of possession and miraculous powers keep happening, and the gods in question know the names of some of his agents, and Valdemar still has plenty of Healers around who have Thoughtsensing, it goes a lot faster. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Well, on the bright side, if he can get Melkor at all the rest of the gods will be pretty much conquered already, he can tell they're spending everything on this. 

 

On the less bright side he is INCANDESCENTLY FURIOUS and it is too damned inconvenient to murder people about it and his nearest mage who hasn't died of a bizarre coincidence can't even Gate him to Jkatha, though with Sauron determinedly steering and no need for the mage to survive afterwards they can make it more than half the way there.

Permalink Mark Unread

They're almost halfway there.

Permalink Mark Unread

There is a field of waist-high flowers, full of dead Quendi (and some still-alive Quendi waiting for their turn).

Telumë is extremely focused, but a small part of him hangs back, detached enough from the process happening around him to leave room for a thin rime of emotion. Mostly a deep sadness. Not regret, exactly - the math isn't complicated, here, this is one of the most clear-cut and justifiable ways that murdering huge numbers of people to build a god could have gone. But... 

...but Fëanáro's family will be going with the volunteers. Might have already; he doesn't know who's in which block. The King of the Noldor can't ask his people to die for him without going as well, apparently, though Fëanáro himself is still needed for the third stage. It's - understandable - but it means that if they do win, Maitimo will have no friends or family nearby to be with him as he recovers, if he recovers.

(And Telumë is sort of assuming that Maitimo won't want to see him, not for a long time, though he supposes he could be wrong.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Everything is going very smoothly, he doesn't know why Nolofinwë spent so much time yelling at him that the logistics were very hard and complicated. The logistics of stage 3 will probably be nightmarish, because that's the part that's not with volunteers - and the work they're doing right now to deny Sauron civilian populations is going to cause them the same problem as it's causing Sauron, unless Vkandis is willing to let them use Karse and Isger. 

 

He feels upset about Nerdanel and all of his children being dead which is stupid because that was the plan and they'll be back soon. Luckily it looks like other people are also having a lot of stupid feelings about this.

Permalink Mark Unread

They're nearly done. 

Telumë is still near the centre of a nexus of almost-unimaginable power. He's mostly not channeling it himself; his job is watching, supervising, doing all the verification steps, this is about ten times faster than he would really have preferred to do the second stage and he's had his math checked enough that it should hold up, it should be safe - so many of the extra stops and checkpoints in the process before were because he didn't have an entire team of brilliant alien researchers helping out...

- something very strange is happening. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë

Permalink Mark Unread

–aaaaaaaaaaa it's talking to him a god is talking to him!

Telumë pushes away the panic. It's his god, that's the entire point, it's - safe - demonstrably safe, demonstrably on their side, he can - all right, he can't relax, his body doesn't seem to be obeying his commands to it anymore - his body isn't noticeably there anymore...

- He's in a place of endless light, shapes and lines and patterns - past and future all around him - 

(Everyone else will notice that Telumë has gone very still. Then he turns around. His body language is no longer particularly recognizable. His eyes are glowing.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

You can call me Foundation, a very young god says through Telumë's lips. 

We are running out of time. Sauron is trying something different.

I need information on what is happening in the south.

Permalink Mark Unread

Vanyel are you catching this -

Permalink Mark Unread

:It would be pretty damned hard to miss it!: Wow this is kind of terrifying actually. :I - have Gate locations south of Rethwellan, I assume that's what They mean, Sauron must've decided to leave the areas where the Shadowgod has any influence - should I just Gate as far south as I can and try to figure out what he's up to...: 

Permalink Mark Unread

Probably - what can we even do if Sauron's killing populations down there -

Permalink Mark Unread

:I have no idea!: He's already building a terminus on the mouth of the nearest tent. Honestly it's going to be a relief to be anywhere other than a field of flowers and corpses. :I mean, the Star-Eyed has people there - I think the issue must be that She can't see what's going on, the gods' Foresight isn't that helpful with Sauron. Maybe if I come back and report to a god that's apparently way better at communicating with humans, They can tell her and do something: 

Permalink Mark Unread

He will ask Telumë's research team if there's anyone to do all the rest of the checks at this stage since Telumë is possessed by the god, or whether Telumë being possessed by the god obviates the checks.

Permalink Mark Unread

They can definitely do all of the checks; Telumë getting possessed by the god is a positive sign but doesn't mean they shouldn't check, although if they're really running short on time they could maybe afford to skip over some of them. 

The mages who aren't required for that will rest, and try to be ready to Gate somewhere on short notice since that seems like it might be what's happening next. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I am not yet powerful enough to see a path to defeating Sauron, the god says. It seems the intention was for my ascent to be fuelled by the lives of mortals, and those gods who are my allies agree. Mortals who speak for Valdemar. Do I have your permission to do this. 

Permalink Mark Unread

This is the worst ethical dilemma to have ended up in. "Y-yes," the King of Valdemar says. "But not yet - we need to run some checks first..." 

Permalink Mark Unread

Of course. There is still a little time. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Vanyel lands on the outskirts of Kata'shin'a'in, where Jkatha, belonging to who knows what god, borders the Dhorisha Plains, territory of the Star-Eyed Goddess (and also the location of a lot of weapons of mass destruction, albeit far underground.) 

He falls to his knees immediately, because that's what happens when you spend four hours feeding the equivalent of a million human lives worth of blood-power through yourself and then decide to Gate well over a thousand miles like some idiot. 

Permalink Mark Unread

A man clad in the black of a Swordsworn on blood-feud is coincidentally nearby, and lunges to catch him.

"...Herald Vanyel?" Ke'valen says. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Emergency - evil torture spirit from another world is - about to bring back an evil torture god from the same place - who's currently trapped in the Void - I need to figure out what he's doing in Jkatha..." Vanyel digs in his pocket for his scrying artifact, he doesn't need a visual - he can adapt it to use mage-sight... "Where's the nearest temple in Jkatha itself? Find me a priest from there. Need to talk to a local god." 

Permalink Mark Unread

He gets clear of the territory of the horrible Valdemar god, steers as far as he can away from the Star-Eyed's territory, gobbles up villages - the next major population center will be enough to do it, this is really annoying but they need to succeed every single time and he only needs to succeed once and they can't act here -

Permalink Mark Unread

It's been maybe fifteen minutes. Ke'valen has brought him a drink of water and a blanket to lie on. Vanyel is scrying very quickly for magic - Sauron is in Jkatha, Sauron is moving through villages, he's fast but he's not infinitely fast and has no one to Gate him anymore...

And he's fumblingly talking to a priest of Anathei of the Purifying Flame. The poor man is so out of his depth, but he needs to get his attention - needs to get his god's attention, warn them to spend down all the luck and unlikely coincidence they have to make it even just a little more inconvenient for Sauron, because Sauron has so much less distance to cross than they do and he must be getting frighteningly close by now.

- which is when he gets a VERY STRONG PREMONITION. Vanyel has never gotten a premonition before in his life - there's the Foresight dream he shared with Leareth once, it feels like several lifetimes ago, but that's pretty different–

"I need to go," he tells the man in halting trade-tongue. "Ke'valen - I think I will probably be back, with more orders..." 

He gets up. He feels light all of a sudden, kind of giddy, but no longer too exhausted to manage another Gate. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Foundation is still possessing Telumë. This seems to be the fastest way to do the checks, on a god-being which is no longer physically located in the material plane. 

What did you learn, Vanyel?

Permalink Mark Unread

Vanyel stumbles through an explanation. "He only needs one more major city, he'll be there in less than an hour..." 

Permalink Mark Unread

- he tumbles through light and dark, roads and dead ends, walls and doors - the way through is narrowing - there is a door he never wanted to open, all along he hoped there was another way, but every other way is blocked now - 

Permalink Mark Unread

And one of the Tayledras mages responsible for channeling power during stage two walks forward to stand at Telumë's side.

Permalink Mark Unread

His voice, when he speaks, is not his own. We join together now. We must.

Permalink Mark Unread

We see only one path, the infant god says through Telumë's body. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Vanyel, the Star-Eyed Goddess says to him. Wingbrother to k'Treva. You must return to Urtho's Tower. You must retrieve the weapon that you decided against using to kill Melkor. You must bring it to the priest of Anathei. 

Permalink Mark Unread

And Foundation speaks again. First, however, somebody must Gate Mandos to Jkatha. It may not be too late to make arrangements for the lives lost there to return fully, in time. 

Permalink Mark Unread

And then the light fades from Telumë's eyes and he collapses in a heap. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Mandos manifests into a physical form; a Quendi man with a haunted, expressionless face. 

GREAT EVILS ARE BEING DONE TODAY, he says.  I WILL GO TO JKATHA, THOUGH THIS LESSENS THEM LITTLE.

Permalink Mark Unread

"Yes, we're aware of that." Burning down the continent before Sauron can reach it... This is going to give Vanyel nightmares for the rest of his life, he thinks, but that doesn't mean he can afford to second-guess himself now. He's still filled with that same odd lightness. Apparently there are some advantages to being under the remit of a newly-born Velgarth god, one of them being 'infinite Gates'. 

He raises a Gate to where he remembers the high temple being, in Jkatha's capital city - the poor local priest had kept stammering that really he wasn't at all qualified for this... He doesn't go through, though, just waits for Mandos to cross before dropping it. 

Permalink Mark Unread

We will come with you to channel the power, Brightstar says with the voice of a goddess; the other thirty or so Tayledras Adepts who volunteered for this are joining now. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Um, sure - you can pass it on the the right place? I have no idea how any of this works anymore." He starts working on the second Gate. "Um, probably I don't want thirty people tramping around Urtho's Tower - I'll come back through this one and then change the destination..." 

:Fëanáro, I'm apparently going to be pretty busy for a bit, er, can you - make sure Telumë's all right...?: 

Permalink Mark Unread

Sure. If we're not ready to use the power from Jkatha yet do we have a way to store it - will the Star-Eyed - 

Permalink Mark Unread

The Heartstone network will hold it, the Star-Eyed says via Brightstar. This much and no more. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"If we really have to we could move ahead now," Telumë's head researcher is saying. "It looks like - hmm, I think probably Telumë just needs to be wherever it's happening. And enough of our mages, of course. But if we're denying Jkatha to Sauron, then - we should take all the time we can on this, even the really fast plan was meant to be twenty-four hours, I - assume we can't afford that long, anymore..." 

Permalink Mark Unread

Is Telumë conscious and can they maybe throw some Healing at him.

Permalink Mark Unread

He seems to be waking up a little now, he's mumbling something incomprehensible, and yes of course some of the Healers can go to him, everyone's been kind of in shock because what happened was very surprising and very fast but some instructions will jar them into motion. 

Telumë isn't hurt; he's got moderate backlash but that's probably from all the work earlier, not from being possessed. Within a few minutes he's sitting up, dazed and groggy but able to remember where he is. 

"...Can someone please tell me what happened?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Your god possessed you, said he needed intel on what's going on in Jkatha, asked Treven for permission to use Valdemar, sent Vanyel. Vanyel came back and reported that Sauron's in Jkatha, and getting close to having the power he needs. Your god and the Star-Eyed agreed on a plan to use one of the superweapons from Urtho's Tower to - level Jkatha, I think, and take the blood power before he can - and then we have a couple more hours before Sauron can get anywhere else - and the Heartstones to hold it -"

Permalink Mark Unread

"Oh." He takes a minute to absorb that. Drinks the water that's being offered to him. "Are the checks being done?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Yes," the same person says, "we're doing it through the focus, like a Heartstone - I don't know if that's going to keep working, maybe we can drop that off wherever we - do the rest - instead of you having to be possessed again." 

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë rubs his forehead. "Being possessed is apparently very tiring. Do you need my help?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Not right now. Get some rest." 

Permalink Mark Unread

The high priest of the Temple to Anathei in Jkatha is very startled when a Gate appears right in front of the temple. 

Permalink Mark Unread

And a couple of seconds later he isn't startled again, because he is instead filled with divine light. 

I am told we need to speak, the god says through his disciple's lips. 

Permalink Mark Unread

MANY GREAT EVILS ARE AT WORK IN YOUR WORLD. I CAN SHOW YOU -

 

And he understands, from the Shadowgod, how to shape what he's sending so that Anathai can understand it. Two worlds on a collision course; an evil god here and a greater evil god about to be summoned, and a desperate group in the north working on a god of their own, which Mandos is inclined to gloss as yet another evil god but certainly of a sort more friendly to the continued existence of human civilization on Velgarth. All of this is already in the works, and little can be done about it, though Sauron should be slowed if he possibly can; soon the dead will flood Anathai's afterlife, and Mandos can help, if he wishes, to hold onto more of them.

Permalink Mark Unread

Anathei needs a moment to think, but not very long, at least not as humans reckon time; the kind of thinking that Velgarth gods do is rather smeared out, across the past, when future were seen hazily, and also the futures He can see now. The picture grows much sharper now; the Foresight was very blurry before, disrupted by currents half outside of view. 

- two paths - a horror not fully seen, slipping into the world, a wall of darkness ahead - or a conflagration of flame, but, perhaps, light on the other side - 

Anathei, like Vkandis, is a god with a propensity for fire. He knows which path is better for His purposes. 

He will accept Mandos' help. 

Permalink Mark Unread

...On reflection, Vanyel thinks as he stands in Urtho's Tower, probably having thirty Tayledras Adepts tramping through is a lot better than risking the weapon going unstable as he crosses and exploding everything in the north. If it's going to explode on contact with a Gate, that Gate ought at least be to Jkatha. 

He waits. The Star-Eyed can see, dimly, via the Foresight-Eyes of the Jkathan primary god, currently in a conversation with Mandos. Who will hopefully be fine when the entire country he's in goes up in flames. 

It takes about fifteen minutes, which is faster than they'd expected. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Now, his son says with the voice of a goddess. And holds out his arms to take the weapon, which is small enough for one person to carry. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"You're going to..." There's no point in having this conversation, actually. He hugs Brightstar. Picks up the weapon. Gives it to him. 

Raises a Gate to a different place, this one on the outskirts of Throne City. Might as well not drop it literally on top of Mandos. 

He snaps it down as soon as his son is across, and Gates the remaining Adepts to Kata'shin'a'in, where they'll be close enough to channel the energy about to be released. He stays behind in the Tower for a moment. It's probably the safest place to be within several hundred miles, given that it's under a hundred feet of fused stone. 

Permalink Mark Unread

- ripples in the future - two paths collapsing into one - 

It is happening now, Anathei says. 

Permalink Mark Unread

- and the high priest is suddenly just a mortal man again, falling to his knees on the flagstones. 

Permalink Mark Unread

- Mandos reaches out and folds the man into his arms, and then everything around them is white-hot and very, very loud. 

Permalink Mark Unread

 

 

Oh come the fuck on - how did they even do that - 

Permalink Mark Unread

The weapon tears open a tiny crack to the Elemental Plane of Fire. It's not stable, to have a connection like that, it snaps back in a fraction of a second, but the pressure of it momentarily tears the crack much, much wider. Pretty much all of Jkatha is going to be a giant crater.

Anathei bathes in flames. He's going to come out of this stronger, not weaker, which is a good starting point when you need to immediately resurrect your entire mortal population before you can really do anything else. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Sauron's not going to get any of the blood-power from it, either! Not even from his immediate vicinity. Thirty Adepts with the power of their Goddess behind them can make sure of that. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He is starting to develop some kind of a grudge against the Elemental Plane of Fire, though he's sure it's a lovely place.

This is too much magic, too much movement, all while concentrating on clinging to the blood power he needs - he spends a while holding still in the crater of Jkatha, orienting himself. 

 

 

Fine. Where's the nearest population center. They can't just keep right on doing that, and if they do it will be a victory of its own, though a very infuriating one.

Permalink Mark Unread

Velvar. Most of the country is sparsely-populated dense jungle, with some roads hugging the eastern edge; the capital city, Ashuel, has almost a hundred thousand people in its surroundings. It's three hundred miles to the south. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He can't disguise himself to mage-sight, not while carrying three hundred seventy thousand souls of power, but he can stop BURNING A TRAIL WHEREVER HE GOES, and it's not like there's anyone alive nearby to see him clearly. He stabilizes himself. He heads for Ashuel as quickly as he can, which will still be more than an hour, aaaaargh.

Permalink Mark Unread

Vanyel stands up, wipes his eyes, glares at his hands until they stop trembling, and raises a Gate on the doorway of the just-vacated Work Room where the weapon was stored. He heads back to the north.

Immediately flops down in the flowers, hopefully not literally landing on top of a dead body because - well, his day is pretty ruined already but that would not improve things. 

Permalink Mark Unread

(Mandos, while he was here, did something with the Quendi bodies; maybe just destroyed them, maybe sent them over to Lórien. The field of flowers is available for flopping in.)

Permalink Mark Unread

:We did it: he tells Fëanáro as soon as he's sort of caught his breath. :And by 'did it' I mean left a very large crater in a country that Valdemar doesn't have any diplomatic relations with and which belongs to a god who found out about this being a thing half an hour ago: He feels pretty awful about it, actually. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë has just started feeling a bit more normal, finally, so it's just perfect, really, when the feeling of being filled-with-burning-light comes back. 

Permalink Mark Unread

We are running out of time, Foundation sends. He will not stop. We have only hours.

Permalink Mark Unread

Vanyel clambers to his feet. "What, um..." He swallows. "What's our actual plan for...after?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

Foresight does not show him clearly. But Telumë knows him and his magic. When I am powerful enough to combine that with the futures I can see, I think I will see the rest of the path. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"...Great. The 'I think' in there is really reassuring." Sigh. "I guess we don't have any better options, and - having those people still alive isn't going to be better, if Melkor wins here." 

Permalink Mark Unread

I know you had wanted to do more checks, but I am afraid that we need to start moving now if we are to see the path in time.

Permalink Mark Unread

Vanyel shoots a helpless glance at Fëanáro. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Well, it seems like a safe bet that Melkor winning will be worse than Foundation winning even if somehow in their years of checking they missed something and Foundation is actually going to pursue some completely random and arbitrary thing. 

Does it fit, Sauron reaching another city within hours?

Permalink Mark Unread

:He was in Jkatha... He'll head for either Seejay or Velvar, I assume. How fast do we think he can move?:

Permalink Mark Unread

I don't know. Huan can outrun a Companion.

Permalink Mark Unread

:Then - hmm, two or three hundred miles - I think 'hours' is right. We should gamble it and move now: 

He turns back to the entity speaking through Telumë. "Er, where to?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

K'Treva Vale. The evacuees of Valdemar and Rethwellan are there and so is a Heartstone, which will allows access to all the rest. Please bring the mages. I will not need them after this part but I am still not strong enough to draw in that power alone. 

Permalink Mark Unread

...It's finally occurring to him that draining nearly all the power from all the Heartstones is going to be pretty awkward for the surviving Tayledras afterward. It's better than Melkor winning, though. 

He raises a Gate - a nice big one, so all the mages can cross quickly, again he feels very light and giddy and not tired at all. :Fëanáro, will you come to use the Silmarils again?: 

Permalink Mark Unread

Yes. Is this the last time we'll need them?

Permalink Mark Unread

They're going to make at least one more stop - no, two, surely they'll need both Iftel and Karse to meet their numbers - but after this, Foundation will able to just eat the power released without needing it channeled, apparently, which makes the Silmarils less additionally useful. 

:I think so: 

Permalink Mark Unread

Just - missing everyone, you know. He takes the Silmarils and heads over to the Gate.

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë walks across, still glowing and moving a bit like a stick puppet. They leave the crystal focus behind; it's not the main place where the god lives, anymore. 

Permalink Mark Unread

They are in a forest, some of which has been very hastily cleared. It's packed with terrified people, interspersed with Tayledras trying to reassure them. The trees are twisted and strange. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I need to talk to somebody who can speak for Rethwellan, Foundation says. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I, um, I think they lost their entire government when Petras went down..." Vanyel glances around, trying to find faces that look more Rethwellani than Valdemaran. "Hey! You!" 

Permalink Mark Unread

"...Yes?" The man who comes forward is dressed like a merchant, not especially wealthy but not poor either. 

Permalink Mark Unread

What is your name.

Permalink Mark Unread

"It's, um, Jadran." 

Permalink Mark Unread

Jadran. I will ask you to speak on behalf of your country, since there remain no others better suited. We are losing a war with an evil god from another world. In order to fight back, we need more strength then we have. The only path to have this is blood-magic. I ask your consent for the people of Rethwellan to be included in this sacrifice. I know it is a very large thing to ask. You will return to life afterward, we have arranged this, but it may take a long time.

Permalink Mark Unread

Jadran looks so upset! He bites his lip and blinks helplessly for a while. 

"...I, er, I mean, we're going to die anyway. Aren't we. Or - worse." Rumours of Vkandis' rule in what was formerly Valdemar, alongside - someone or something else - didn't fail to reach Rethwellan. "So - if we can die now to stop that, then I think we should." 

Permalink Mark Unread

Thank you. This will not be forgotten.

Foundation turns to face one of the Tayledras. Did you have a plan here. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Some stacked Final Strikes," the man he's addressing says. "...Now? We can pass word to our mages..." 

Permalink Mark Unread

Foundation looks at Vanyel and Fëanáro. Are you ready. 

Permalink Mark Unread

No, it doesn't seem possible that in a thousand years he could be ready for this. "Yes," Vanyel says out loud. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Yes."

Permalink Mark Unread

And about three hundred and fifty thousand people die, everyone from a major city or town in Rethwellan or Valdemar who was able to reach one of the Gates in time. 

It takes less than fifteen minutes. Which shouldn't be possible, really. 

It's not a huge additional amount of power, but it adds a third again to Foundation's current strength. 

Permalink Mark Unread

The Heartstone. Telumë's body turns to face it. This, we can do more quickly. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Vanyel does some quick mental math. The original Heartstone network contained roughly two million human lives' worth of excess energy that could be drained off. Now, with the life-energies of everyone in and near Petras and everyone in Jkatha as well, it probably has another two million lives' worth sloshing around. This is going to make Foundation a lot stronger, very quickly. 

...It would be awfully inconvenient if it killed Telumë, but at this point, they could probably do the rest without him. His god exists. Likely Vanyel himself could be possessed instead and act as a mouthpiece. 

:Now: he tells Fëanáro. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He stops his heart. He was worried about this part but has since warmed up to Mandos. The Silmarils can do the rest themselves.

Permalink Mark Unread

Vanyel was needed during the last part, to channel energy, but the Heartstones are basically doing it themselves now, feeding it into Foundation - who isn't really located in Telumë, but mostly outside of ordinary space entirely - he can feel it moving and transmuting and then seeming to vanish. 

It goes at a steeply accelerating rate as the god grows stronger, able to absorb the power faster. All told it takes about ten minutes. 

Permalink Mark Unread

It hasn't been long at all, really, since Karis tumbled through a Gate. Less than an hour. 

She was close to the Palace, though. She's not sure if Vkandis passed a message or what, but nobody stopped her on her frantic sprint there. 

She holds her daughter. Strokes her hair. Sings to her, softly, a Karsite lullaby that she remembers her own mother singing. 

She's pretty sure she knows what's going to happen. She isn't afraid. She can wish, sort of wistfully, that something in the last year went differently, but she's too tired and drained and empty for there to be any anger left.

Maybe Vanyel will come back for her... No, that's not a stop he can really justify, not at this point. At least she got to see Arven one more time. 

She holds her daughter and sings, and waits. 

Permalink Mark Unread

They Gate to the Ifteli border, leaving behind most of Telumë's mages to help the Tayledras clean up. 

Permalink Mark Unread

(Telumë is conscious in flickers, though he's not particularly in control of his own body. He's not very fond of that part but it seems worth it, now, and - it's not like he really wants to witness and remember perfectly everything that they're doing right now. Though it feels a bit like cowardice, that. Vanyel is going to remember it.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Foundation moves Telumë's body right up to the shield-barrier. They're on a major road and there are some extremely worried-looking priests on the other side. 

We are fighting a desperate war, he says. I have the permission of the god to use your people's lives to help win it. I wish to ask the permission of a mortal who can speak for your people as well. 

Permalink Mark Unread

There's some panicked shuffling around. Finally an elderly priest comes forward.

"We have received a very large number of prophetic visions and such about this," he says. "I am only relaying a decision made in the capital, but, yes. You have our consent to do this thing."  

Permalink Mark Unread

And then his eyes glow with Vkandis' light. 

You are hurried. I will help. 

Vkandis has a particular efficiency advantage for setting things on fire. Things such as cities. He can't get everything neatly, not in the minutes they can spare, but Iftel has a large population, concentrated in a dozen major cities, and they can get a million that way. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Vanyel Gates them to the border with Karse. Despite whatever the god is doing to help out, he's getting very tired. 

...He wishes he could go back for Karis, and Arven. Brightstar is already dead and he barely had time to say goodbye and - no, he absolutely can't think about that right now, it can wait until after. Everyone is going to have lost far too many people, by the time this is over. 

(Assuming they're not too late...)

Permalink Mark Unread

Foundation repeats the same question in front of the more fragile temporary shield-wall that's sprung up around Karse. Gets the same answer. 

Permalink Mark Unread

The fires are visible in the distance. 

Permalink Mark Unread

The air feels heavy, almost like it does near the Valar. Telumë's body turns to look at Vanyel. 

I see what we have to do. Sauron is going to Ashuel, in Velvar. He is almost there. Telumë will need to do the Gate. He knows the way. Help him. 

Permalink Mark Unread

The light fades from Telumë's eyes, and he falls–

Permalink Mark Unread

Vanyel catches him. They don't have any Healers. He tries singing a Healing song. Hopes that they still have enough time. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë wakes up a couple of minutes later, but it's another few minutes before he's alert enough to both understand Vanyel's frantic instructions and also attempt a Gate to the place he remembers. It's very close to where he reincarnated. He supposes Sauron wouldn't know that. 

(Coincidences within coincidences...) 

It's not a very good Gate but it'll get them across. 

They arrive on the outskirts of the city, and Vanyel has to catch him again and support nearly all of his weight. Telumë isn't particularly following what the plan is, here. He's dizzy. It's horrifically hot despite being late autumn. 

He really hopes his god has a plan. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Vanyel holds Telumë and reaches out with his mage-sight, stretching north, north - is Sauron close...? 

Permalink Mark Unread

Yes. One more fucking city and then this will all be over, all be worth it -

Permalink Mark Unread

The figure of an exhausted-looking and familiar human teenager stands in his path, on the road, visible from the distance. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Oh, and also Vanyel, who isn't sure what he's supposed to be doing here. He supposes he could Final Strike? He's unclear how that would help though.

Permalink Mark Unread

how - but they don't actually look equipped to fight him - what happens if he tries lighting them on fire on his way into the city - 

Permalink Mark Unread

That super doesn't work. Also for some reason he can't get past them into the city at all. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Fine. He draws to a halt. I hope you are enjoying yourselves. If you are very brave and very determined, little heroes, you can probably take every life on this continent before I can. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Vanyel, despite himself, chuckles. The air is feeling heavy and strange again, and Telumë is straightening up beside him. "Oh, you know, I don't think we actually need that many." 

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë lifts his head, looks Sauron in the eye. He can feel the light coming again, but it takes another fraction of a second before his vision doubles and then mostly vanishes. 

He thought he would be afraid, but he's way too goddamned tired for that, and it's not like he remembers Sauron that clearly from a previous life.

"You are not going any further," he says, and there's a strange echo in his voice - it's his words, but not his words alone. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë's god - if he has made it - cannot possibly have any claim on this land here. So he has to be working only through Telumë and Vanyel, and - 

spending power is the last thing he wants to be doing right now but he focuses his energy to make the ground open up underneath them, to make the air itself catch fire, to make a thousand shards of glass fly out of nowhere -

Permalink Mark Unread

The ground falls out from under him, the air burns, the glass flies, but somehow - it looks more like it's by lucky accident than as though there's a shield in the way - none of it touches them or causes them any inconvenience. 

–And then the light fills him to the brim, and the world disappears. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë stands in a shining city, the details unclear in the blazing light all around him. 

How would you destroy a Maia, his god asks him. If you had the power of a god. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Tear apart the raw magic that it's made of for parts, obviously, but - he doesn't know the technique that would work, he has ideas for research avenues but that would be a project of ten years–

Permalink Mark Unread

No. It is enough that you could know it, in the future. Buildings shift, a door opens, a path clears. The light is even brighter ahead. Because I see the future, and I know it now.

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë's body that the god is wearing takes a step closer to Sauron - a step on air, since the ground is, in fact, no longer under them. The air around him glows brighter. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He should back off, have this fight only once he's confirmed that they've done this everywhere - he flings up a mountain between them and him, turns in the other direction -

Permalink Mark Unread

She has no idea what's happening anymore. 

It was supposed to be about forty-eight hours from the point where their process was interrupted, even following the most rushed version of the plan, and instead it's been, oh, eighteen or so. All the mages Gated away from the staging-area just over an hour ago and they're completely out of contact, and–

–and it's starting to feel like maybe they've lost. But she'll sit here anyway, with Maitimo who is currently unconscious, sit here and watch him and wait. 

She's tempted to kill him if she gets conclusive evidence they've lost, even though Telumë definitely didn't give her permission for that and it's not like it'll make much difference in the end, even if Mandos somehow escapes. But she's not sure she could actually bring herself to do it. She's never killed anyone before. 

She watches the oath in his mind; it shows up to her Sight as a hideous metal ladder-like thing that's been inserted right through the tapestry, so that nearly every thread is knotted to it. With the scaffolding she's added, it was a lot of work, carefully knotting all those same threads in exactly the same places to the metaphorical 'framing' underneath, trying to tie everything where it'll mostly-sort-of hold together even if the oath breaks. Which does mean he'll still be evil (if they win, she can hope...), but - substantially less broken, which hopefully would mean substantially more fixable. 

...

She's bored and so she's been adding a bit to the scaffolding, she might as well, and she's watching very closely and sees the exact moment that it breaks. It's messier than her best-case scenario but not as messy as she'd feared it might be; it sort of snaps, splinters, and then disintegrates, all inside of thirty seconds.

She lets out her breath. Allows herself a small, tight, satisfied smile. Good work, Telumë. She doesn't know where or how, but somehow they pulled it off. 

Then she gets to work trying to tidy up the torn and damaged bits of tapestry, while it's still fresh in her mind what they looked like before. 

Permalink Mark Unread

- he wakes up. 

 

So it must be over. And - 

- and Telumë won, and Telumë is alive, and it's sort of odd to have that much evidence about geopolitical events accessible from the inside of your own head - and the thing Jisa proposed, to keep his head intact, seems to have worked, because his head is intact - 

- but that means they still can't trust him and that means he should probably stop thinking about what he believes and values and wants, until Telumë comes in here to clarify whether that's what he wants, because it's not any less dangerous than it was before. (It is probably a little less dangerous than it was before. The amount of harm he can do is probably much more bounded. But it's not safe.)

He thought about this some, in the not-death place where the mathematicians were working on Telumë's god. He has a little bit of a dilemma. He thinks that he needs to be able to think - fully, unbounded by magic or by the knowledge that people are listening to his thoughts and that the wrong ones will make him too dangerous to keep alive - in order to figure out who he is. He suspects when he imagines the situation as an outside observer that at the end of this process he will not be particularly motivated to try to torture everyone in the universe, because almost no one ends up that way. But he's dangerous until he's at the end of that - and he doesn't see how to even start on it from here, where he keeps all his thoughts carefully centered around what Telumë needs - 

- no, wait, maybe he can work with that. Telumë needs to be able to believe that he did the right thing, here, and Maitimo has no idea if he did the right thing here, but he's glad to be alive, and that's a fact about the world which will help Telumë believe that he did the right thing, and Telumë won, and that's a fact about the world which will help Telumë believe that he did the right thing, and - 

- and if Maitimo were recovered quickly, quickly even as hurried hurried humans count time, then that would be a fact about the world that would help Telumë believe the right thing - 

- except that's stressful, because he's worried that he will skip a lot of steps if he tries to jump to 'recovered' from here, he'd have holes he could cover for if Telumë couldn't read his emotions and Telumë's people couldn't read his mind, and probably if you are evil and decide to just act like you are, instead, a good person you remember who existed a year ago, some of those holes are important, some of those holes will get in the way of people actually trusting him and believing he's recovered - he keeps bumping into the walls of what it feels safe to think here, he's increasingly suspecting he was right the first time that he can't make progress here - 

- there's a new god, presumably -

 

People pray to the Valar sometimes. If you call their names in the right spirit they will hear you. People pray to Eru sometimes. It's said that he always hears you. Maitimo does not feel remotely reassured by this. In Valmar songs of the Valar are popular. People talk about - the conviction that someone is on your side, that you are loved unconditionally, that you are in the hands of those who will use you for good. Maitimo has never particularly tried to enter this mental state about any gods because the Valar and Eru are not on his side. Right now no one is on his side, actually, because his side is objectively the horrible one - 

He has tried to enter this mental state about Telumë, sometimes, because it hurts much much less than being entirely at the mercy of someone you don't consider entitled to do whatever they want with that - 

 

Hey, god? I don't know if this works and I think it's probably lower priority than - man, what else could possibly be on the god's agenda - making really sure Melkor can't get out of the Void and anything that can't be done at all if it's not done in a week - but I think it might be important? For Telumë, and for the Noldor, and for - there's kind of a lot of stuff I could do, really, if I could trust myself to do it - 

Permalink Mark Unread

There's nothing at first, and then there's a brush of - something... 

- the distant sense of light, of a shining city - vaguely reminiscent of Tirion under the Trees - open windows, open doors, paths stretching into the distance - 

I am not exactly sure how to do this yet, a voice that isn't quite a voice but is a little like osanwë whispers . 

Permalink Mark Unread

- I think the thing you are doing is working. The Valar are louder but I don't know that that's an improvement. He doesn't even have osanwë anymore but it's the most natural way to think of what he's doing here. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I am afraid I did not really understand your question.

Permalink Mark Unread

Maybe I should try to break it down into more concrete questions. 


Uh. If I think about it for a long time, what will I end up wanting the world to look like? Or would it depend a lot on how I thought about it?

Is killing Eru the kind of thing someone could do, if they worked really hard on it for a really long time.

Is Telumë okay and what does he need right now.

Permalink Mark Unread

The first question is difficult and the answer is not conveyable in words. I could show you more directly but it may not translate very clearly.

Permalink Mark Unread

I would like that. 

Permalink Mark Unread

And the strange sense of being in a glowing, blazing imaginary city vaguely like Tirion draws nearer. 

- there is a road ahead - forks to several roads that become twisting paths - doors that are closed but might someday open - doors that are locked but might someday have keys - windows that show dimly what lies ahead - 

- and some of the paths are far longer than others - some wind into the shadows - dead ends - ladders and stairways that hint at tempting shortcuts over the rooftops - but without an obvious path forward and so many ways to fall - 

- and off in the distance the ends of many paths converge - a place that is hazy but blazingly bright - not the same as the point where he started, if he were to look back - 

Permalink Mark Unread

- not the same as where he started, that's - good, that's important - he feels relieved about it, it'd be easier obviously if he were just aiming for where he started but it'd also feel fake - 

 

Okay, shortest path there, what do I do.

Permalink Mark Unread

Why do you wish so strongly to take the shortest path?

Permalink Mark Unread

I am a prisoner and when I am trustworthy I will be free. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I think that...

Pause.

It is not words but I will show you again.

And the god points closer at the strange city-map of his possible futures, it's more of a vague gesturing than an explanation, but the gist seems to be that what he just said, the patterns in him that underly that, is not obviously pointing at one of the shortest paths, though also the metaphorical cityscape is kind of blurred and the god can't see it perfectly either. 

I do not think I can direct you any more clearly, at least not at this time. I am sorry.

Permalink Mark Unread

 

That makes sense but it's frustrating. 

The end place, if I get there - would a person in that place be allowed to live in your world? Would they be satisfactory?

Permalink Mark Unread

Yes. Of course. This world, as we will build it, shall be big enough for many people in many places someday. It is not someday yet. But that place, if you reach it, would be perfectly acceptable even now, I think.

Permalink Mark Unread

 

Not big enough for - the way I am now. Or was an hour ago, now I am mostly trying not to poke anything hard enough to tell if it's still there.

Permalink Mark Unread

Not Velgarth, no. I think even our wider future could not hold who you were an hour ago and also give you the freedom that you desire and that all people have a right to.

The god feels sort of sorrowful about it, apologetic even. 

Permalink Mark Unread

It hurts even though he knew it was true, even though he wasn't even asking. It feels like there's - something, there, that he can get a hold of - oh - 

 

He wants to make the world wider, so it can have more awful sorts of people in it. (The more palatable frame, which he can reach for readily, is that those people already exist, or have existed,  and he wants the world to be a place so robust that they can be free without hurting anyone else.) It's the clearest thing he's wanted since he woke up. He doesn't want it from the same place as he wants to torture everybody in the universe (that's tucked away behind shame and exhaustion and desperation to hide it, it's in the place where he used to keep the fact he wanted to have sex with men), he's actually pretty sure that the person-he-used-to-be would agree with him about it - the person-he-used-to-be said once that it hadn't been a mistake to want to parole Melkor, just to do it before they were ready - 

- it'd be an interesting challenge, right, to build a world that wasn't exploitable, and a necessary one because there are other worlds, and could be other visitors, and - there were a lot of good things about Valinor but the ease with which Leareth could have torn through it, if he'd wanted to - the ease with which Melkor had - and Velgarth was similarly fragile to Sauron, in a different way - but you could probably build something that wasn't.

- he feels like this might be surer footing for the shortest path and he knows that thinking about that won't help but he's doing it anyway. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I think that is a very reasonable thing to want, and perhaps a useful direction.

- a view through a window of a door standing ajar - not yet in reach but in sight - and light blazing through the crack - 

I am not sure Velgarth will ever be that wider world, but some world, somewhere, will have to be, even if it is not mine. If we are to win fully. Is that what you were thinking?

Permalink Mark Unread

Yes. There are a lot of worlds. Velgarth has a complicated balance of power among a lot of gods and it has people who don't fully come back when they die and other kinds of damage you can't reverse and far too many people have suicide fireballs and you could make it wider, but not wide enough for Sauron. But he can sort of vaguely imagine that you could make a place, someday, that was wide enough for Sauron, without coming at the expense of anyone else. It'd still be a cage, maybe, but it'd be such a very big cage.

 

Can I leave? I don't mean to do anything horrible - he can do better than that, he can form a very firm intention not to, he'll let himself think whatever he wants but he won't do anything that he doesn't want the god to see in Foresight - but I think I need to leave. I think it'll be better for Telumë, too. I'll come back. If you would like I can tell people about you, wherever I go. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I think perhaps distance would help, yes. Where would you go? Do you have a way to get there?

Permalink Mark Unread

I can't formulate plans around leaving, it's one of the precautions. But if it's all right with you then I bet they'll let me think about it.

Permalink Mark Unread

I will speak to them. It seems quite clear that your being able to think about it, at least, is better than the alternative.

A pause.

You had other questions. On the matter of killing Eru. That is not something where I have the information to judge, yet, since the Foresight of Velgarth does not apply in other worlds. It is not obviously impossible. Why do you wish to kill Eru?

Permalink Mark Unread

I hate him and I think most of this was his fault.

Permalink Mark Unread

That makes sense. For your third question, Telumë is still in Velvar, very far south. It was a difficult fight, at the end, and he is not conscious yet.

- a flicker of the city again - the perspective a little blurred but the path straight and wide -

It appears he will be back here with Vanyel in two or three days. As to what he needs, that is less clear. 

Permalink Mark Unread

If he doesn't want to be married to me, could you break the marriage? Is it the sort of thing that's possible?

Permalink Mark Unread

The god shows him a glimpse of the city again, presumably this time for Telumë. It's very twisty and confusing and hazy but all the paths stay within certain quite clear bounds. 

I think it would not be impossible, however, it is moot because in all of the futures, he wants to be married to you. I suppose if you wished to break the marriage anyway, there could be a conversation about it.

Permalink Mark Unread

I don't let myself think things that would make it intolerable to stay here. Once I'm out I can let you know, I guess?

...is this costly? How do gods work, what causes you to have more resources, what do you have to spend them on -

Permalink Mark Unread

This is not especially costly. You are in the centre of my territory and I am drawing on processes that I am running anyway, since predicting your possible futures is an important component of steering Velgarth forward. Also, in some days' time, Telumë will ask me if I can help you. Since I know this, I may as well start trying now.

Permalink Mark Unread

He feels rebellious about Telumë asking, Telumë has done enough sculpting him. This is a silly way to feel about it, of course Telumë would ask.  And of course if the answer were that Telumë had done enough sculpting him then that's the answer he'd be given.

 

Vkandis wanted - temples, people trained as his priests -

Permalink Mark Unread

I was born here; I have something much better than temples or priests, I have the people who created me.

A pause, almost cautious.

And...the help I would offer you, if you want it, is not sculpting you according to what Telumë wants. Telumë may have been foremost among my creators but he is not my master now. I am not here to shape people towards Telumë's vision; I call myself Foundation because I am here as solid ground that can be built upon. Which includes providing safety rails, but in the end, what you choose to build is up to you.

Permalink Mark Unread

As long as it's not 'torturing everybody', but that - doesn't feel totally arbitrary, actually, like it did the last time he contemplated it. (He still wants it but he can shove that deeper down. If a god sees mostly in Foresight then maybe they don't see all your wants, just what you might do, and - after everything that feels like a fairly extraordinary kind of freedom.)

 

That's what Leareth wanted. He thought - there'd be a world that couldn't countenance the things he'd done, to build it. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Part of being an entity that exists to provide safety rails is that I must scaffold a world where all of the people can build what they wish to, and most people do not wish to be tortured forever, so - in that sense, that part is not arbitrary. I suppose that maybe if for some reason there were people who did, it would be acceptable for others to torture them. You should note that I am a very young god and I am not sure yet how best to accomplish this project. 

Permalink Mark Unread

So it is totally reading his mind about all of the wanting to torture people, awww, there was something comforting about - being judged by his foresight footprint alone, and he's pretty sure it doesn't have any torturing people in it. He is going to set that aside and think about it later.

He had noticed, that the god is very little and hasn't figured everything out yet. The god is presumably much smarter than him and has wildly more information than him and yet it feels like there's something that's not wholly there yet, still in progress, still finding its feet. (It? He? She? They?) It'll be terrifying, once it is there. Or terrifying for the brief interval between when it gets there and when it gets better at disguising it than Maitimo is at noticing it. But he's pretty sure that space hasn't been crossed already. 

I think my part in it is to get out of here and go wander around talking to people and stay out of trouble and talk to you more once - once I know which parts I want to help with.

Permalink Mark Unread

I understand. I will be here if and when you wish to speak again.

And the vague sense of there being a bright shining city just in the corner of his eye recedes.

Permalink Mark Unread

 

Well. That could've gone worse. 

 

To the extent he has formulated a plan it is to think about leaving and he can't think about leaving so he can't make progress on it yet. So he should - he doesn't really want to sing, or draw, or read a book - 

- he can hurt himself, it he wants to. It won't hurt Telumë right now, because Telumë isn't conscious, so it's just a question of whether he prefers to be in pain or not. The god won't object; he's allowed to hurt himself. It is probably the only way to increase how much suffering there is in the world that is definitely still under his control, at least on those rare occasions where Telumë isn't conscious. 

He does that. He can only keep it up for a little while; he's gotten out of practice at enduring it, probably. It is satisfying to have the option but he doesn't really expect to exercise it very often. Though - the option to do it without hurting Telumë would be nice. It scratches some kind of itch, if he's aware at all times that he could increase how much torture there was in the universe in a way that didn't interfere with his other goals, if he wanted to. And then if he usually doesn't - that's a fact about what he wants, isn't it.

Permalink Mark Unread

Melody is outside of the room reading a book and paying some attention to Maitimo, mostly the overall structure of the tapestry and not his thoughts, she noticed he was awake, and thinking, and then - thinking in a way that looked odd and different, which she has guesses about but didn't confirm, spying on someone's prayers with a god seems sort of rude. 

She definitely notices that though, even if she's only watching out of the corner of her eye. She puts a bookmark in her book. :Maitimo, I'm not going to stop you but I am curious why you're doing that: 

Permalink Mark Unread

The god said Telumë's not conscious, won't be for a while. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Which isn't a complete answer but she can put together the rest. :I heard, but helpful to have confirmation. Want some breakfast?: 

Permalink Mark Unread

Sure.

Permalink Mark Unread

Melody comes in. She brings some hot food fresh from the kitchen, rather than the usual fare that's left out for whenever he gets up.

"Seems like you noticed we made the god and we won," she says, in a level voice. "I think the scaffolding was a good idea. It would've been extremely messy if the oath had broken without that, I think. Still ripped up some things, I did my best to fix it, but probably not everything in your head is going to be very load-bearing right now. Not sure how much you've noticed." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"A little bit, I think. I don't have as many feelings about the war ending as I expected and I think when I do have them they're going to tug some things oddly. I - appreciate the scaffolding. A lot. And the god thinks I can get to a place that - works, so that's good."

Permalink Mark Unread

Nod. "I was going to ask what you talked about with Foundation. You don't have to tell me, of course." She puts the food down for him and tugs at her sleeve. "Actually, speaking of that - I'm going to wait until I have a chance to talk to some other people, but now that everything's over, I think we could dispense with some of the honestly kind of absurd precautions we've been keeping you under. We could give you one of those Thoughtsensing shields again, maybe, at least when you're not with people. I know it's been making you feel very constrained, that we could be reading your thoughts at any time, and - I think you need not that, at this point."

Permalink Mark Unread

"I told Foundation I wanted to leave. And he agreed. Or, well, he asked some logistics questions and I said I couldn't think about those and he said he'd tell you I should be able to think about those, and then at the end I said I needed to leave and go figure stuff out and we made plans to talk after I've done that. I think - part of it's the knowing you're reading my mind, but a lot of it is - trying not to think anything that might make it intolerable to be here, trying not to think anything that'd make me mad at Telumë - I need to leave. I think I'll come back. I would say I don't even think it'll take very long but probably by human standards it'll take a long time. I suspect if I could think about details at all I could come up with a scheme that didn't seem too dangerous."

Permalink Mark Unread

Melody is quiet for a moment, fidgeting with the hem of her dress.

"...That took you not very long at all to come to a similar conclusion to mine," she says, smiling; she sounds a little impressed. "I think you need space. I think Telumë needs space. Everything you said makes a lot of sense. I - can probably get that restriction taken off before Telumë's back, actually." She hesitates. "Do you want to see Telumë before you leave, if we decide on that? I would understand completely if not. So would he although I'm sure he'd have some feelings about it." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I don't know. I'm - not really sure whether I'll be mad at him once it's safe to be and it might depend on that."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Then it sounds like you shouldn't? We definitely need to come up with something that'll make it safe for you to be mad at him, whether that's you leaving or not, and - I mean, if you do that thinking and conclude you're not mad at him and want to see him, you could always do it then." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I mean I could maybe try having it be safe to be mad at him now and seeing whether I am fact am and, if not, I could say goodbye. ...but maybe I just shouldn't."

Permalink Mark Unread

"I would be concerned that it's hard for it to feel safe being mad at him when you're still physically located in one of his places and we haven't decided yet whether it's a good idea to let you wander the world, not to mention he's presumably– hmm, actually I have no idea if he's coming back here right away. There's kind of a lot going on. Anyway. wouldn't judge you for being mad, but it might, well, make it intolerable to be here, and no matter what we decide I would feel more like I was doing my job right if you stayed at least a week. Given that I'm not totally sure some part of your mind isn't going to just unravel when confronted with anything surprising and it seems worse for that to happen when I'm not there." Shrug. "That being said, if you never wanted to see my face again, that would honestly be pretty reasonable too." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Foundation said they'd be back in two to three days. I ...guess I do not want to do any thinking about Telumë or about being here before it is definitely decided that I can leave."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Makes sense. I won't poke that any more, then. ...I will note for some future occasion that I've got plenty of thoughts on the topic of Telumë and his you-related decisions in the last year, but we definitely shouldn't talk about that for a nice long while. and I won't be the one to bring that conversation up first." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"That sounds good. I - I'm glad Vanyel's okay and I hope everyone else Telumë's been relying on is okay and I wouldn't leave, if I thought he needed me. But I think it might actually be better for him to not have me, for a while."

Permalink Mark Unread

"...Most people aren't very okay right now," Melody says after a beat or two. "Depends how you define it, I guess. We'll manage." 

Permalink Mark Unread

 

"I ...can wait? It won't be great for me but - if it is actually somehow an improvement to the overall amount of post-war support network to have me sit in my cage telling Telumë about books he wrote and fucking him once he feels like we've had enough interaction to pretend it's a relationship, I - uh, maybe I'll have more trouble with it than I estimated at the start of this sentence -"

Permalink Mark Unread

"Oh gods please don't do that?" Melody says, blinking and raising her eyebrows, which is about as horrified as she ever looks. "That won't help at all and even if it did, I - we're not putting that on you."

She folds her hands across her lap. "I guess what I wanted to say is - if it's somehow loadbearing to you feeling like you can leave, believing that Telumë is fine, then - we need to figure something else out. Because I don't feel comfortable lying to you about the state of reality, and Telumë is extremely not fine - the last few months were really bad, the last forty-eight hours were awful..." She trails off. "I don't know. Like I said earlier, I think having some space will make things better rather than worse, although also I want to figure out what's best for you without it being mostly about him. To the extent that's possible." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Okay. I think - 

- maybe I'll just ask Foundation? Whether to say anything before I leave, I mean, I'm definitely leaving. Presuming that Telumë doesn't decide I'm staying."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Telumë isn't going to decide that. Honestly I think he'd let you leave even if it were the wrong strategic call, which I'm confident in saying it isn't given that Foundation is on board with it." She frowns, thoughtful. "Given that, I should grab Nayoki now and get her to give you back the ability to think about this. Do you want osanwë too? We agreed in advance that'd be fine." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Yes, I would."

Permalink Mark Unread

Melody can undo the block right now, then, it'll take less than five minutes. "We've got osanwë shielding on the larger facility but I think it ought to be fine for you to talk to anyone who's around, actually. It's not like you're going to sabotage any of the god-researchers' work at this point." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Never actually had any angles on that. It's too technical for me and getting it wrong would be genuinely awful. ...I would've tried seeding doubts in people about their perfectly good math, so they delayed when they didn't have to."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Heh. I suppose a god that decided to pursue some completely random and arbitrary goal wouldn't be great for Sauron's values either." She stands up. "Need anything else right now?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I don't think so. Thank you. 

 

Is anyone I know dead?"

Permalink Mark Unread

"...About that. I wasn't sure when to tell you, it never feels like a good time, right, but - yes, pretty much all of them. There were just over three hundred thousand Noldor volunteers. Your family...didn't think it was right, to ask them to step up and die for this and not join them. I'm really sorry." She bows her head. "That's - part of what I mean, that nobody is very okay right now. It'll be all right, though, Mandos has them." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Oh."

Permalink Mark Unread

Melody looks up at him, waits to see if he's going to say anything else, and then tugs the collar of her gown straight and heads for the door. "Osanwë me if you need anything, all right?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Sure."

Permalink Mark Unread

He's left alone for about five minutes and then Nayoki is back. She gives him an appraising look, presumably with several kinds of sight other than her ordinary eyes. 

"I am just going to take everything off," she says decisively. "I think you are not in the mood to hurt people right now, so I am trusting you with that. Also there are not very many people here anyway and we all have shield-tokens so it would be quite difficult."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Also the god! I have been sort of assuming that the god is going to make it hard for people to hurt each other. Are you doing all right? I heard it was a very bad two days."

Permalink Mark Unread

"It was. I am doing reasonably well. ...I am not sure what Foundation would do, actually, it has not exactly come up yet. They are very strong here in the north and might just be able to shield people directly, which is not normally something gods can do. More likely all of us would get warnings if the Foresight showed you were going to do something. I make a strong prediction it does not." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I don't think so either. I want to come up with a reasonable non-worrying plan to leave and then go wander around. Sing to peoples' crops, maybe. Are there still, uh, people, living in villages and cities and so on..."

Permalink Mark Unread

Nayoki actually kind of lights up. "That would be very good! There are still many people in Valdemar and Rethwellan especially living in smaller towns and villages that were not worth evacuating when Sauron started attacking, and...for the same reason, were not worth - using for our work. I have not heard much yet, but one assumes they will have many problems soon, given that less than half of the population remains and everything must be very chaotic." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"It sounds very difficult. I would sooner help my people, but - I can't, so I will do what I can here."

Permalink Mark Unread

"You know, I feel it would be polite of the Valar to end the banishment once you are obviously not evil anymore, but - I am not sure if that is the sort of thing they do, and also we are not exactly there yet." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"They said twelve thousand years. I think probably they meant twelve thousand years and I would be pretty surprised if they reconsidered it in less than half that."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Twelve thousand years! Are they always like that?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

"No one has ever deliberately killed another person in Valinor before! But they took it about how I would have expected them to."

Permalink Mark Unread

She nods. "Anyway, I am all finished here. ...I was going to say you can walk around outside the room if you want but I think if Melody did not fix the spatial block you would get very lost. I think there is no reason not to undo it now, and you could tell us when you definitely need to be able to go to the surface, but - I am going to ask Foundation just in case." She goes quiet. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Thank you. Is Kalira here and are her parents all right, I want to say goodbye to her but I should know if I'm walking into a more difficult conversation than that."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Kalira is here! Her parents are fine although they are stranded in the Pelagirs for some reason, things got very confusing in the last couple of hours. She would be very happy to see you." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Okay." Then once his head is his own he will open the door and try to osanwë her. Kalira? The war's over! Do you want to stop by?

Permalink Mark Unread

Oh! Someone must have taught her to do osanwë public/private thoughts properly, at some point. Yes, I do! I will come right now!

Permalink Mark Unread

Great!

- and he will see who else in the facility he can get a read on, just so he knows more about who is here, what is going on -

Permalink Mark Unread

There are not that many people, several dozen (no Quendi). Most are keeping their thoughts private. The rest, judging by their thoughts, aren't from this compound at all and just ended up back here in the general chaos. They seem to be non-specialists; a couple Healers, the rest non-Gifted humans from Telumë's logistics staff. 

He'll see glimpses in their thoughts of a huge Gate, Quendi filing through and singing - a field of flowers springing up from nowhere - Tayledras mages - Quendi dying...

The mood is complicated. They're quietly triumphant, and also very tired, and - grief, pain, one woman had a daughter studying in Petras when Sauron took the city down in flames - one man is worried about his cousin's family in Karse, he's not sure if they would've been among the sacrifices Vkandis offered for the new god - another woman doesn't even know if her husband, one of the mages who frantically Gated to k'Treva Vale, is alive... At a guess it's only been about eight hours since everything happened.

One woman is currently talking to Foundation. Maitimo can only pick up her half of the conversation, which makes it pretty confusing, but she's...guilty, sad, wondering if they did the right thing...

Permalink Mark Unread

Obviously they did the right thing. But - he's pretty sure that one of the pieces he doesn't have anymore is the piece that'd feel sad about slaughtering millions of innocent people, and if you have that piece and it's very loud then maybe it's a bit more confusing. 

 

He leans against the wall listening and thinking until Kalira comes, and then they can talk about birds and he can maybe direct the conversation a tiny bit to be about her post-war plans and how other people are taking the news and so on.

Permalink Mark Unread

Kalira is kind of hard to redirect. She has very little idea how other people are taking the news, it's not the sort of thing she knows how to pay attention to, although she can tell him that people in the dining hall are very quiet since it happened. She's happy that she's going to be allowed to move back with her parents again; she's very matter-of-fact about the part where agreeing to be friends with Maitimo when he was evil, the second time when he had memories, meant she basically had to stop seeing anybody else she knew; she was allowed to send letters back and forth with her parents and that's almost as good but she says offhandedly that they probably missed her more than she missed them.

"Foundation is very good," she says happily. "She doesn't know very much about birds even though she's a god, she told me gods don't see that kind of detail so well, but I can tell her about birds! I think I want to go south. All the way south, to the sea, to see the birds that were in that book." A little shrug. "Foundation told me it could be dangerous still, even though she's a good god, because she only has lots of power here in the north, and the gods all the way down by the coast aren't allied with her yet. But I can tell people about her and she gave me directions for how to build a shrine to her, so I can talk to her anywhere, and then other people from that place could talk to her too if I told them. I think that would be good. And it's okay sometimes to do things that aren't safe, if they're good things and you thought about it. That's what my ma said when I wanted to be your friend even though you were evil." Uncertain look. "Are you still evil?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

"That's a good question! I don't really know. I could have asked Foundation but I didn't really want the answer so I didn't. I am planning to not be evil, which is kind of like not being evil? When you get back from the south I will probably have a better answer for you."

Permalink Mark Unread

Kalira scrunches up her face. "I think Foundation might not give you a straight answer anyway. tried to ask her if you were still evil and she said it's a concept humans think in and not a concept gods think in? And then when I asked if we would still be friends later she tried to show me Foresight. Someone in the dining hall says her Foresight is less confusing for humans to look at than it was with other gods, because they made it to be that way, but it's still really confusing and I couldn't tell what it meant. But she said that it didn't look like you were going to hurt people and that if I wanted to be friends with you then that was a very good thing for me to do. So can we still be friends?" She looks wistful for a moment. "Are you still going to think birds are interesting? Most people don't and most people aren't evil so I wasn't sure if you only did because of being evil."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Of course I am still going to think birds are interesting! None of the facts about birds have changed at all just because I am not evil!" This is half a lie but gives her a better set of predictions about him than the truth would. It's - oddly freeing, to feel allowed to steer the world a little bit like that, he mostly had been trying to avoid it lest it look like misbehavior. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Kalira beams at him. "What are you going to do now?" she asks. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Probably I am going to leave and wander around and see the world and figure out what I want to do. I can sketch any rare birds I run across. I might help sing to peoples' crops, apparently lots of people are in disarray because so many people were killed in the war between the gods."

Permalink Mark Unread

Kalira nods, seriously (being sad about everyone who was killed is the sort of thing you're supposed to do, and so she is sad, even though it's not interesting.) 

"I think all my cousins are dead," she says simply. "My ma and pa were scholars at the mage-academy in Petras before they went to work for Leareth who came back as Telumë. I think the other gods who decided to help make Foundation were very clever because when Sauron exploded Petras, they made it so our side got all the blood-magic instead of him, but it's still sad. They're going to come back but I asked Foundation and she thought it would take a long time because all the gods are very tired. She said 'tired' isn't quite the thing but it's what translates best." She looks down at the floor. "I think all the birds in Petras died too and maybe they won't come back, though." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Probably not. I'm so sorry. I don't know if birds have souls and so are the kind of thing that could come back. In Arda I think they do not, they are just made of the stuff that makes them up and if you destroy that then there's nothing that could come back."

Permalink Mark Unread

"I think they must have something because Animal Mindspeakers can read them, but - oh, I can ask Foundation." She goes silent for ten seconds. "Foundation says that they have - mind-stuff, the way it works in Velgarth almost everything alive has a little bit of that, but it's only a tiny bit and it doesn't - hold together at all when they die? Like it does for people? So you can't bring back the same birds again. That's very sad." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"That is very sad. I wonder - hmmm. Does it not hold together specifically because there are complicated things that human brains do that bird brains don't do? Because some birds are at least as smart as a little human baby, birds can talk and learn and make friends - so it can't just be about what the brain is doing - Quendi get souls three or four weeks after we are conceived but I have no idea what the equivalent in Velgarth is." Foundation? Do you happen to know?

Permalink Mark Unread

The sense of a shining city in the distance comes to his awareness again. 

This is complicated and depends on facts about the world specific to Velgarth; I think it is different in Arda. In Velgarth, souls are much smaller than the total of a being - much of the living being's processes are only in the brain - and their size is proportionate to the eventual adult complexity of said being, but the slope of the relationship is greater than linear. A little human baby has a much 'larger' soul than an adult bird even if their brains hold the same intelligence.

Pause.

This system may be subject to change. The Shadowgod has already worked with Mandos to change how this works for humans, so that they can be brought back more completely.

Permalink Mark Unread

Maitimo has no idea how he feels about birds. Probably if birds dying is actually bad then he should be all in favor of it, and against efforts to retrieve bird souls so they can go be birds again. Though Melkor and Sauron weren't particularly in favor of death, really - death was Eru's style of awful thing - 

"Foundation thinks maybe we could learn how to save birds that die. Probably not birds that have already died, but - maybe someday."

Permalink Mark Unread

Glowing smile. "Maybe I can help with that!" Her expression is now that of someone who's wondering whether they've discovered their life's purpose. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Maybe! It would take a lot of magic research, I think. Improving human resurrection took another god of death and resurrection."

Permalink Mark Unread

Kalira nods. "All right, I think I want to go talk to Foundation about that now." She stands up and smooths down her dress and gets the very polite, slightly stilted expression that she usually does when having any social interaction other than 'talking about birds.' "Is this saying goodbye then?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I bet I can osanwë you from pretty far away, because we are friends. A couple hundred miles, maybe. So until you go south I will be able to tell you a little bit about my adventures."

Permalink Mark Unread

"All right!" She clasps her hands in front of her. "Do you want a hug goodbye?"  

Permalink Mark Unread

"That sounds lovely." He has no idea what he wants and isn't going to think about it for at least a week.

Permalink Mark Unread

Kalira hugs him, sort of carefully and gingerly, and then bounces and smiles and then heads out. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Maitimo lies back down and sings to himself for a very long time.

Permalink Mark Unread

Vanyel Gates back from Velvar two days later, as soon as the Healers in the small outlying Healing house that he found in Ashuel think Telumë is recovered enough from backlash to be moved. Vanyel isn't exactly feeling great himself, but he didn't get hit nearly as hard in the final battle, and it seems better to be back in home territory sooner rather than later. It hasn't been a very restful few days, given how anxious he's been about ensuring Telumë's safety while he's basically completely helpless and in a place where his god has very little power. 

He stumbles into the Gate-terminus room with Telumë in his arms, hands him off to some Healers as soon as he can, and then exhaustedly makes his way to find Melody. 

Ten minutes after that he's at the door of Maitimo's room. Which is open, he notices. "Hey," he says, putting in substantial effort to keep his mouth from slurring the word, he's so tired but it seems important to have this conversation before rather than after he flops somewhere and sleeps for the next day. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Hey. - you look dead on your feet."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Kind of. It's been - a wild ride. I, er, came to tell you," he leans on the doorframe, "that - Telumë isn't very up for seeing you, although if you really wanted to he thinks he could manage. He thought you probably didn't want to." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I don't. I'm leaving. Foundation said I could."

Permalink Mark Unread

Vanyel nods. "Melody told me. It seems like a pretty good idea to me. She was waiting for Telumë to get back, but - I don't actually think this should be Telumë's decision. Telumë doesn't think it should be his decision. So, um, it seems to have ended up on me instead, and I'm fine with it? As long as you have a plan that's safe for you. The north would be safe, it's Foundation's core territory, but we're less sure of Valdemar and Rethwellan, and Vkandis seems to have decided to lock down the borders to Karse and Iftel." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"If you wanted to give me a shield-talisman that'd be neat but I expect I can make do. And I also expect if I die now it won't be such a mess, without an oath Mandos doesn't know how to work with and what with being dead apparently being in fashion among the Noldor."

Permalink Mark Unread

Vanyel nods. Looks down. "I'm really sorry." He looks like maybe he wants to say more, but doesn't. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He can infer from the things that people in the research center were thinking about what must have happened to almost every single person still in Velgarth who Vanyel knows. "A lot of people paid a lot for this. Let's just - use it, to rest and recover, and eventually - uh the best thing for a Quendi in your situation would be thousands of years of wandering around singing but probably that's not actually best for you - 

- Kalira has decided she's going to figure out how to resurrect birds, since some of them are probably smart enough they don't want to die. We can - hand things off to her generation, for a while. Wait for the dead to come back. And then I bet there'll be a way forward, even if I don't see it right now, and it won't take thousands of years."

Permalink Mark Unread

Vanyel nods. "You know. I really didn't think I'd be coming here and having you reassure me, but - in hindsight I'm not actually surprised, and - thank you."

He massages the palm of one hand with the other. "I still have Stef. The Valdemaran government-in-exile is still alive - Trev wondered about, er, whether he ought to include them in the sacrifice like your family did, but it's sort of different, right - the Noldor have enough left for someone to be in charge in the interim, and also Arda isn't the world where the war was happening. Valdemar is in really bad shape, what with...everything... They've left already, to try to pick up the pieces." 

His eyes are burning. "Karis is dead. And Arven. They were - in Sunhame - Vkandis... She must've known it was happening. I - we had so little time, I wanted to Gate in and pull her out but we couldn't even spare a minute to do that... I think probably they're coming back? But I don't actually know, we - didn't have Mandos at that point to negotiate with Vkandis about the souls of the dead. I should probably collect him at some point, actually, as far as I know he's still sitting in the middle of a giant crater in Jkatha. Long story." 

Permalink Mark Unread

Hug?

Permalink Mark Unread

If Maitimo's offering a hug then Vanyel will super accept it. He's - pretty unsure where Maitimo is at, emotionally, but it didn't feel right to pester Melody about that, and it seems unlikely it'll help to ask him. 

"We'll give you a shield-amulet," he says. "You should ask Foundation for the instruction on how to talk to them anywhere - it's not too complicated, apparently, you might even be able to consecrate a portable shrine and take that with you. And, er, I'm not in great shape for Gating again right now, but I could do it later today if you want. Most of Telumë's mages are stuck out in the Pelagirs near k'Treva for, um, reasons. Do you have thoughts on where exactly you want to be dropped off? I can do just about anywhere in Valdemar - I can't do Rethwellan but Jisa could, if you wanted to do two hops..." 

Permalink Mark Unread

Hug. "Valdemar sounds good. I can tell people what happened, sing to fields of crops and so on. And I'm not in that much of a hurry, you can get some sleep and take some time and do it in a couple of days."

Permalink Mark Unread

"All right." Vanyel considers whether there's anything else useful to say, and decides there isn't, so he nods to Maitimo. "I'll tell Melody." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"And then lie down and get Stef to sing to you."
 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I think he's been waiting to do that for days." 

Permalink Mark Unread

And Melody is in about ten minutes. She's smiling. "So you're headed out in a few days? Here - I got you one of the shield-talismans that does Thoughtsensing too." 

(It doesn't shield Mindhealing Sight, because that sort of shield is very hard to do. She'll be able to see his tapestry just fine.)

Permalink Mark Unread

"Thank you. Yes, I don't think Van should be doing any more Gates right now but I think it'd be good for me to leave soon."

Permalink Mark Unread

"For the sake of all the gods, did he offer to do one for you right now? Vanyel. Why is he still like this." Sigh. "Usually Nayoki could do it, but even if you bounce her your sense-memories of Haven, I don't think Haven is going to be very recognizable at this point. Anyway. The thing I want to do right now, if you'd like, is to bounce you my Sight of your mind? It'll be just the structure, not any thought-content, but - I would feel better about all of this if you had that context." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Sure, go for it."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Jisa's Sight-metaphor would work better for this, I think, but this'll do." She Looks, then makes it public to him. 

Quendi minds show up as more structurally complex and multilayered than human ones, but Melody is pretty used to that at this point, and can give him 'views' that are the easiest to interpret, and commentary as needed. The most noticeable part is that the overall tapestry has been wrenched into a very weird shape; the places where the oath touched, which is almost all of the places actually, are still visible as a sort of negative space, and the tapestry is kind of pinned into that shape still by various bits and pieces of Melody's work, both the scaffolding maintained in advance and some later patches where the scaffolding wasn't quite sufficient. 

The shape is roughly what it was two days ago - Melody can bounce him a blurrier memory of that - but the patterns of strain are shifting, redistributing, ending up more uneven and concentrated in some places more than others, where different areas are clearly in tension with each other. It looks very fragile, actually. The kind of structural support Melody can put in is much, much weaker than what the oath was doing. 

There are hints around the edges of patterns woven fresh in the last few days, which aren't really part of the oath-enforced configuration or especially related to it, but they're very thin edges so far. A lot of regions in the tapestry are mostly folded-up and dark, not being accessed.

"I wanted to show you this because, as you can see, this is not very stable," Melody says calmly. "I can't tell where exactly it'll break first, I think that'll depend on - what thoughts you end up deciding to have, in what order, maybe what experiences you run into - but something is going to break, probably pretty soon, and it'll be very noticeable. I find myself wanting to offer you some way to contact me, if you're somewhere in the middle of nowhere and feel like you can't cope - I'm not sure messages with that kind of specificity are the sort of think Foundation can bounce around between people, and it's not really what they're for, anyway - but I would also understand if you really prefer not that." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I prefer not that." It will probably hurt, a lot, when he gives himself time to think, when he figures out which pieces of himself he's going to give up in order to continue to get to do things in the world, it will probably leave him in pieces, but he doesn't want any of them to get any part in it.

Permalink Mark Unread

Nod. "I think you can manage fine. I would be more worried about most people but you're not most people." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I have a perfectly good model of the Maitimo you liked and trusted. I expect I will continue having access to it whatever feelings I have. I am not planning to do things that will upset anybody, because if I were then it'd show up to Foundation and I couldn't go away in the first place."

Permalink Mark Unread

Melody nods. Looks like maybe she wants to say something else, but doesn't. "Well, I'll be around until you leave but I won't bother you unless you ask for anything. After that I think I'm going to Rethwellan, probably. Valdemar somewhat shockingly managed to keep all of our exactly six Mindhealers through this entire war, I am kind of mystified as to how, but I think Rethwellan's in worse shape than that. So I won't be here if you end up deciding to come back. But - well, good skill." 

She waits to see if he has any other questions before leaving. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He doesn't.

"You too."

 

He sings some more. Tries not to think about anything too complicated. He doesn't want to break anything while he's still here.

Permalink Mark Unread

The next few days are uneventful. There's no sign of Telumë, his mind isn't even findable with osanwë. A dozen more random logistics staff who aren't shielded or doing private thoughts trickle in. The mood is very subdued. People are shaken and grieving and it all happened so ridiculously fast, months and months of careful planning and then less than a day of frantic final preparations. All the deaths across Velgarth happened in an hour. They're very relieved that building a god in half the time given by even the most rushed actual plan for it ended up working out this well. A lot of them have mixed feelings, but everyone agrees Foundation turned out great. 

Permalink Mark Unread

And then Vanyel arrives, looking less tired but if anything more distraught than before, he's hiding it well but not hiding-things-from-Maitimo level well. 

"Gate?" he says. "Any preference for north, south, east, west...? North is less of a mess, Sauron didn't head past Haven before turning around. Southwest is the worst off." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I think north. If I'm more sure I want to be around an awful situation later I can walk."

Permalink Mark Unread

"That makes sense. Are you packed? If you're packing anything, that is. North should also be easier to get Foundation's attention if you end up wanting to. Although we're hitting winter so it'll be cold. You're going to want warm clothing - I hope someone thought of that because I really didn't..." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I have clothes and supplies."

Permalink Mark Unread

"All right." And Vanyel will Gate him to a sleepy little town called Polsinn, on what used to once be the northern border of Valdemar (said border is now another two hundred miles north, after the last major annexation of unclaimed-by-any-state territory in the preparations for a potential war with Leareth.) He remembers it pretty well. It's where he did his first ever away mission and it hasn't changed much. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Polsinn is very ugly by Quendi standards but it seems completely intact. Maitimo lands right next to the town square and inn. There are some children throwing corn to chickens, which seem to be wandering around freely rather than penned in. They all turn and give him a startled look. 

"Are you a mage?" the oldest, a little girl of eight or so, says. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"No. My name is Maitimo and I am a Quendi, we're from very far away. I asked a mage to send me here."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Oh." 

Some looks are exchanged. The biggest girl seems to get priority to talk to him, by dint of being older. She steps forward. 

"My name is Clari and this is my papa's inn!" she says proudly. "We just made a new ceiling in summer. It's a good ceiling. You're tall. Are all Quendi tall like you?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I am an unusually tall Quendi but all Quendi are taller than humans once we are fully grown. My father thinks that might just be because we grow slower and we never go hungry."

Permalink Mark Unread

A smaller boy, probably the girl's sister judging by his matching shade of brown hair and eyes, bounces. "Oh! You're from the other world! We heard about the other world." 

"I heard the other world is very nice except for the part where for some reason it has gods that're evil," the girl says, with all the dignity a very small eight-year-old can muster.

The children start bickering amongst themselves about whether any of the gods here are evil or they just fight with each other for other reasons. They seem to have heard about the Vkandis takeover but have only the vaguest sense of how it went down, and they got word something happened recently in the south but they're very hazy on what.

Permalink Mark Unread

"Well, it doesn't have them anymore, Herald-Mage Vanyel fought them and he won."

Permalink Mark Unread

"There was a song about him doing that but we didn't know if it was true," the girl says seriously. "Sometimes songs have things in them that aren't true, you know." She starts singing it, not with particular skill but with great enthusiasm. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He sits down cross-legged on the ground to listen. (He would like to go away from the village and think but probably first he should make sure he's friends with everyone in it.)

"We have some songs about it too! And there was a second war more recently that I bet no one has written songs about yet." And Vanyel will hate them, even more than he always does.

Permalink Mark Unread

"Ooh ooh ooh can you tell us?" the younger boy says. "Please please?" 

"Papa says stories about the war aren't ap-" frown, then very careful enunciation, "appropriate for littles like you. I'm not too little though. I'm almost nine."

They argue about this briefly but then seem to settle it with 'all of them can hear about the war if the stranger wants to tell them.'

Permalink Mark Unread

"The evil god of Arda, Melkor, had an evil - helper-god, a smaller god, Arda has lots of those, called Sauron." He can do accompanying osanwë visuals. "And he came to this world, and he wanted to do a terrible evil ritual that would hurt lots of people, to bring back the original evil god. But he disguised from everyone that this was his goal! And he claimed he just thought that the worlds should not mix, that Quendi should be Quendi and humans should be humans and they should live separately how the gods intended. And he had Vkandis's sympathies, in this, because the meeting of the worlds had made the future very noisy and confusing, and the gods are afraid when the world is noisy and confusing.

So he allied with Vkandis, and tried to kill the Quendi and kill the King of Valdemar and kill the Hero of Many Names, who had helped Vanyel win the war in Arda, and tried even to kill the Queen of Karse, who was loyal to Vkandis and wiser than he was, and saw that this alliance would serve him terribly. But Vkandis, half-blind from all the strange changes in the world, saw only that he would oppose her in this, and so he tried to have her killed. 

And they attacked Haven, and since Vanyel was not in Haven their attack was mostly a success, and Vkandis thought that the disruptions to the world would be over, and Sauron thought that soon he would succeed in his evil plan to raise his master from the dead. And in Arda, even King Treven and Queen Jisa of Valdemar and Herald-Mage Vanyel despaired, because so much had been lost in the attack on Haven, and because against Sauron and Vkandis together they feared they were helpless, and because the first victory over Melkor had cost them dearly and they could not see a path to defeat him again.

But Valdemar's own god was not dead, and was waiting patiently for the path to victory to open. And at last he found it. The Hero of Many Names had died in the attack on Haven, but the Hero of Many Names knows a way to cheat death, and he returned to life again in Velvar. And in him, Valdemar's god saw two opportunities. Firstly, he is proof that death can be cheated, that the dead can be returned to us, forgetful and altered but mostly whole. And secondly, long before any of these things happened, he had foreseen that it might be necessary to go to war with Vkandis, to go to war with all of the gods allied, even - and he had devised a plan to do it. 

His plan was very terrible and dangerous, and so he had discarded it when Arda was discovered, hoping to achieve his aims through peace instead of war. But the plan had not been forgotten. And when the Hero of Many Names made his way from Velvar back to his home, when he made contact with Vanyel in Arda, when he learned how desperate Valdemar's situation was, he realized that it would be necessary after all. 

His plan was to make a new god. The gods of Velgarth find it difficult to talk with us, and we find it difficult to talk with them. But he had designed a way to make a god who understood us, and could speak to us, and would listen to us. The people of Arda volunteered to help him do it. King Treven, too, said that the people of Valdemar would help, if they were asked. And while they worked on their god, Sauron prepared to summon his. 

And on one evil day, Sauron struck. He destroyed cities for blood-magic, hoping to use them to have the power he needed to bring back Melkor. Everyone was desperately afraid, because they were not ready yet to build their own god. But the good gods of Velgarth joined to help them do it. Valdemar's own god gave them time outside of time, to make sure that everything would go as planned. The gods united to steal from Sauron the blood-power he would have used to summon Melkor, and use it instead to create our own god. And the Quendi god of death came to the gods of Velgarth and offered to teach them how to return the dead to life, as is done in Arda. And the peoples of Arda and Velgarth agreed to help build the god, even if it meant their own deaths, knowing that afterwards they would be restored to life in a world freed of evil gods forever. Then the new god and Sauron fought, with Herald-Mage Vanyel and the Hero of Many Names helping the new god, and the battle was long and very terrible but the forces of good were triumphant, and King Treven and Herald-Mage Vanyel returned to Valdemar to rebuild."

Permalink Mark Unread

The children listen in awed silence and by the end he's collected a substantially larger audience of people who were wandering past, mostly children of various ages. The children pepper him for more mind-pictures of evil Sauron and of the battles and really anything he saw, it's very exciting. Some adults eventually arrive and shush them and someone asks if he knows how many people died, and then a woman who seems to be the mother of the eight-year-old girl and younger mother arrives, gathers them up, and asks if they're ever going to leave the poor visitor alone.

"You don't need to entertain them," she says to him, with fondness. "We don't get strangers here often, and if you keep being this nice and patient with them they'll never leave you alone." She ruffles the little girl's hair. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He can give the adults an estimate, quietly, of how many people died, because he knows how many it would've needed to be. He's pretty sure it was all the major population centers in Valdemar, Karse, Rethwellan, Iftel, and Jkatha. And Vinyamar, in Arda. 

 

Does the mother of the children happen to know a place where he could stay a few nights. 

Permalink Mark Unread

They take the news in half-stunned silence, not really reacting much; it'll need time to sink in. 

There are lots of rooms available at the inn, she tells him. No one is traveling up their road much lately, it never got as much traffic as the main North Trade Road and the war affected things too. If he'd rather stay out further of town where it's quieter, she can suggest some friends of hers who have room to host visitors. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He'll stay in town. He likes towns. 

 

If any of them want to meet the new god he knows how to build a shrine to it.

Permalink Mark Unread

Wow, really? The children are SO EXCITED about that! The innkeeper's wife does ask him, worriedly, if this will be all right given that most people in the town go to the Temple of Kernos still (the priesthood of Vkandis never quite made it this far though they heard news of the temples built elsewhere). She doesn't want to offend the new god though. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He does not know anything about relations between the new god and Kernos in particular, and would be happy to ask the new god on her behalf.

Permalink Mark Unread

Oh, wow, does the new god answer people's questions like that? She doesn't think gods normally do. Is he some sort of high priest for Them? Anyway she'd be happy for him to ask. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He does not know if he will end up being a follower of the new god but the new god answers questions very frequently, that's a lot of what the aim of making him was, to make it easier for people to communicate with gods. 

 

He assembles his shrine. He doesn't super want to talk to Foundation, he hasn't made any progress, but - will it cause trouble for the locals if I leave your shrine here and introduce you? They are worried about offending Kernos. 

Permalink Mark Unread

No, it will not.

The sense of Foundation's presence stays more distant, this time, maybe aware that he doesn't really want to talk right now. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Then he will assure the innkeeper's wife of this and show the children the shrine.

Permalink Mark Unread

The children think that's very neat! Is there a special prayer? Can they all talk to the god at once or do they have to take turns?

Permalink Mark Unread

There is not, as far as he knows, a special prayer, though it is a good idea to have your thoughts organized so you know what you want to ask. They should all be able to talk to the god at once, gods have lots of attention.

Permalink Mark Unread

There is a chorus of thank-yous and then the children are thoroughly engrossed. 

Permalink Mark Unread

 

This is enough meeting the locals that he feels like he has stable footing, which means it is time to go and think. He heads out of the village for a while, maybe a mile.

Permalink Mark Unread

There are fields; the harvest is in and the stalks left have been plowed under, so it's all knobbly brown mud, hard with frost. There are patches of ice on puddles and the small creek he passes has a rime of ice arounds the edges. Past the fields is forest. It's easy to walk through, the area under the trees clear and open, combed for firewood regularly. A bird chirps something above him, out of sight; somewhere else, a different bird answers. 

Permalink Mark Unread

 

He sits down. 

Melody thinks that doing this will break his brain. So he had better have a plan now for what to do, in case later he doesn't feel able to come up with one. He is going to go back to the village at sunrise unless he's very confident that he has a better plan than that. He will act normal and be friendly with everybody. If he concludes that he should kill himself he will not do it right away, he will give himself at least a month to think about it. If he concludes that he should really thoroughly kill himself then - the logistics on that will take at least a couple of years to set up, probably, so he doesn't need additional commitments there.

He is proud of himself for how quickly thoughts like those are surfacing, thoughts that were wholly disallowed in his mind earlier because they'd make remaining in Telumë's custody so much harder. He was worried he'd broken his ability to think them but apparently he did it right, just buried it, and now he can excavate it and -

- okay, unthinkable things. Everyone hates him and this is irretrievable as he cannot even go back to Arda and try building it up over time. He is not a prince of the Noldor; he is not really even of the Noldor; he is going to live among humans from here forward and he will always be weaker than all of the ones who are Gifted and also all their stuff is so ugly. This is awful, and it would make sense to have some feelings about it though he's going to try to get through the rest of the unthinkable things first. 

It's Telumë's fault. Telumë wanted to have a good Maitimo back eventually; he should've been aware of how awful it would be for a good Maitimo to lose everyone and everything and be exiled for a long time from his entire home world. Telumë could've held him a prisoner or killed him or sent him back under compulsions that didn't let evil Maitimo burn all of that. It is sort of cruel, to have let evil Maitimo destroy everything and then try to grow a good Maitimo back out of him. Half the incentive is gone. Maitimo thinks that he was good Maitimo mostly for his people and he cannot ever get them back and it's Telumë's fault. 

Telumë is a badly traumatized child and it doesn't in general make sense to hold people responsible for the fact Maitimo can run rings around them. 

And yet the fact remains that Maitimo couldn't've run rings around Leareth, and that was important - that Maitimo can't run rings around Findekáno either, actually - that he doesn't really want a marriage with someone who he can - 

Telumë will probably get better at it, is probably already getting better at it, but Maitimo's busy thinking things he tried not to think, he doesn't want to check them too carefully for accuracy right now. 

Sauron is dead. Melkor is - probably no longer summonable from the Void using the same process Sauron planned to use, Maitimo imagines changing that would've been a priority of Foundation's and one he won't be told about. Maitimo could - try to carry on the mission alone, on a sort of frustratingly stupid scale, figure out where he can get away with hurting people and go there and hurt people. He is probably capable of doing some low-level version of this without getting caught. It sounds desperately boring. 

Maitimo could, instead, try to pretend to reform, planning to behave exactly like a good Maitimo in almost every context but, if he ever has the opportunity to betray everyone to something like Melkor or Sauron, do it. Except that this is exactly the sort of thing Foundation could see, the kind he's least likely to be able to get away with - and also it hurts to think about, spending centuries rebuilding that trust, to spend it again - for the last time, they won't let him start over if anything like this happens again -

- he doesn't like how much the prospect of their disappointment is weighing on them. He meant, by destroying all his interpersonal relationships and getting exiled from his planet, to remove that burden from his thinking, to stop being influenced by the knowledge that the people who loved and trusted him would be disappointed. But it doesn't seem gone; instead it has concentrated itself on the few relationships that he didn't manage to burn. If he wants to keep being evil he probably needs to keep evil company, to be around people who'd be proud instead of disappointed. But who are those, really. There are evil humans but they're not going to want the same things he does. 

Maitimo could instead try to stop being evil. This is the thinkable path, the one he's been implying to everyone that he is on. It is also, realistically, probably the one he is actually on, because Foundation probably would've tried to nudge him onto it. But it's not guaranteed. There were other paths, in that vision, paths that ended in other places. Mostly in darkness. And right here, right now, trying to decide for himself, he doesn't think Foundation can nudge him very much.

He could kill himself. This would be objectively the sensible thing to do if he expects to turn into someone who actively makes the world worse by the light of his current values. However, Mandos will turn him into a good person and eventually send him back, so it doesn't even work. Thus the thought that maybe he should kill himself more thoroughly. If he found a way to stop existing that would be an extremely compelling bit of spite aimed at everyone who made mistakes during the war, and it would foreclose the possibility of all the good that he would do if he changed his mind and became a good person. Now that he's allowed to think about it he likes it as a plan in some ways. It'd be tempting if he had a way to do it. But -

- hmmm - 

- if good Maitimo were expecting to turn into evil Maitimo he would try to destroy himself. He literally did try this, barely a year ago. It almost worked. But he'd been expecting to be forced to change his mind. Killing yourself to avoid changing your mind naturally feels like a really weird thing to do. He's not sure quite why, maybe the fact it feels weird is itself a mistake, but - he's not sure he is so attached to his values that he wants to kill himself to protect against the near-certainty that if he sits here poking them they will change and then he'll proceed to do stuff with the new ones. 

Also it's not obvious that Sauron would prefer it? Eru would. It feels like a very Eru sort of way for things to go, now that he has a sensibility for that. Sauron might well prefer that he - be good, and be impressive, and fix the world, and then of course Sauron would like it to all end in torment and destruction but the point is that he wouldn't want it to be middling in the interim. 

(This observation feels like it takes a lot of pressure off of something somewhere else in his brain. He is suddenly hurting less, and he hadn't noticed he'd been hurting.)

Are there more unthinkable things? He tries some on for size. He could be mad at Melody for using her horrible mindpowers to imprison him and help Telumë torture him and then help Telumë keep him. He doesn't think he is, once he's checked, except about the making him eat. He is still quite mad about that. He could be mad at...Vanyel? That feels ridiculous and pointless. He could be mad at Findekáno for saying he'd stay with evil Maitimo and then deciding not to. Except actually he respects that, it was smart. ...he could be mad at Findekáno for dying and closing off any possibility they could ever actually fix things. He thinks he's actually justified in being mad, about that. Maybe. Probably it is ridiculous to think that marrying someone else is the kind of thing a relationship could otherwise have survived; certainly he'd had vague hopes but he'd communicated them to neither of Telumë or Findekáno. 

Now he's crying. That's - okay, he's not going to do the thing Leareth did after Angband where he kept being surprised to be having emotions, even though it turns out that being surprised to have emotions is quite compelling when you're inside them. He lost almost everything important to him in the last year and he mostly cannot have any of them back and once he's free to think about that he wants to cry about it, that's fine, that's okay. 

 

At sunrise he goes back to the village like he promised himself he would and asks the children if they'd like to learn some crop songs.

Permalink Mark Unread

They do! Also a lot of their parents do, actually. 

The kids are eager and put in a lot of effort but also have short attention spans and most of them are not especially musically talented. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Even young Quendi hold a tune better. Well, if the crops are only actually getting anything out of his singing, that's fine. 

 

That evening he is tired when they are, falls asleep in their inn. Wakes up, to his surprise, in the late morning, hours after all the humans got up. That never happens. 

He sings to their crops. He answers their questions. He asks them to tell him their stories. 

 

In the evening he walks away again. 

 

There's another option he didn't get to the other night because he was too busy moping. It is to deliberately aim for the blend of Sauron's values and Foundation's that he can get away with, that everyone recognizes as a good Maitimo, but that smuggles in as many of his present values as can survive under these conditions. Hating Eru, for example, can stay; hating the Valar can stay; wanting to hurt himself can stay. The parts of him that aren't acceptable will have to actually die, the plan here isn't to hide them, but this way it's only some of them dying, and he keeps as much as he can. 

He feels less tense when he thinks about that. Which is, huh, a pattern - when he noticed that Sauron wouldn't particularly want him to kill himself there was a rush of relief from unnoticed tension, and then again when he considered a blend of values. Probably - he thinks back to Melody's metaphor - probably when he considers what values to have he is tugging himself loose of the way the oath bound his head, and when he finds a reconciliation he's relaxing it again.

This gives him the bizarre and probably counterproductive urge to do whatever increases the tension the most, see whether his head holds up to it. It's upsetting if after he went to all this length to not have unthinkable thoughts he's still having unthinkable thoughts because his brain is tied into knots. Probably he shouldn't do something that might wreck him just because it's tempting, and probably the knots his brain is tied into are "everything that he cares about in the universe", but - 

- he sets aside that temptation for a second. 

The last meaningful option is to try to derive new values from first principles, not strategically aiming at a good blend but just trying to believe whatever it is he actually believes. He's not...at all sure what to expect if he tries this. He pretended to, with his father, but it didn't touch anything especially; he suspects the arguments that work for his father are just really different from the arguments that work for him. But there presumably are some -

- and this option hurts a lot to think about, he draws himself back to consider it a bit - 

- yeah, it's probably the same problem he was observing just a moment ago, where considering whether he actually wants to love and serve Sauron and torture everyone in the universe puts strain on something. Probably a lot of his psychology is tied up in the fact that he loves Sauron and wants to serve Sauron and wants to torture everyone in the universe, and thinking about it threatens to tug down a lot of associated things. 

Which isn't sustainable. He can't go around with a vulnerability like that. Either he wants to torture everyone or he doesn't, and either way he needs to be able to think or what is he even worth - 

He grits his teeth and tries to think.

Where do the things that drive Maitimo as a person come from?

People. They gave him their loyalty and trust and obedience, as a prince of the Noldor, as his grandfather's presumptive heir, and he gave them a nice world to live in, and opportunities to shine within it.

And - still people, when he worked in Haven. They feared and obeyed him, and he rewarded competence and punished cowardice and made them capable of winning the war he thought they'd need to fight.

So maybe there is something useful to be found in the overlap - 

- predictability, being someone other people understood, so they knew what he'd want from them and what he could be expected to do for them - 

- admiration, being someone that people were impressed with, that people expected to succeed, that people expected it to be advantageous to impress - 

- generosity - contextual, of course, in Haven it was an act of generosity not to have people tortured to death for being annoying -

- trustworthy - someone it is possible to negotiate with, possible to cooperate with - 

It feels like a very unflattering picture of himself that he is painting here but probably that's what happens if you try to figure out what your good and evil selves have in common. Maitimo likes to be understood, admired, trusted, relied on; he likes to be generous, he likes people to be grateful for him -

Can he build something with that. 

If he declares that the core of who he is - and it's an aesthetically disappointing core, it can't really be his long-term plan, but as a temporary stopgap - what does that get him.

 

 

Well, it is pretty opposed to torturing people. Most people will not admire you for that. Most people will not trust you, if you do that, even if you only do it sometimes. Most people are not in such ridiculously awful situations that they'll find you generous - 

Really liking torturing people is terrible for all of his other goals. 

So was being gay, and he did it anyway. 

So maybe he has an incomplete account of how Maitimos work. Maybe sometimes they want something so much that it's more important to them than being - but it wasn't more important, he'd planned to get the fact that he was gay changed if he ever needed to, he wasn't willing to alienate the Noldor over it -  maybe sometimes they want something enough to take the stupid-in-expectation risk of smuggling it in with part of themselves even though if it ever comes out it will destroy them - that doesn't resonate quite right either, and everything hurts -

- different angle. 

He can torture himself. No one would mind, if he could work out a way it didn't hit Telumë. He did it, sometimes, while Telumë was unconscious. But - not very often. Why not? Because he didn't really want to.

And that's a weird thought, right, he does want to, he wants to with a fervor and intensity that you probably need an oath to achieve, and yet he didn't want it enough to do it when he could, for free. 

Would he have wanted to if there was someone else that he could hurt, but in some fashion that didn't inconvenience him? Probably, just because the downside wouldn't have been as salient - which isn't a very good reason, the downside is identical -

He tries that on for size. If he is ideologically consistent he should torture himself all the time. He doesn't want to. Therefore he doesn't actually consistently value torturing people. He - inconsistently values torturing people? Which isn't a reason to stop valuing it all together but it feels like a hitch in his thoughts, in the concept that there's some underlying truth here he's trying to read.

 

It is, at this point, hard to think; all the concepts are swimming, and they feel fake. He's not sure this is a route to make progress. Probably he should try it for more than one night before he gives up on it, though. He goes back to the town. Sings. Watches the sun rise. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Everything is terrible. 

It...shouldn't be...they won - but that's what his mind keeps telling him. It's been five days and Telumë is still barely able to get out of bed, which probably isn't helping his emotional state either. It turns out that being possessed by a god, a baby one at that which doesn't know how to possess people carefully yet, and then eating a Maia and nearly four hundred thousand lives worth of blood-magic, isn't very good for humans.

Everything hurts, and he's having trouble fitting together the pieces. It feels...

...it feels like his side won, but it does not currently feel like he, himself, is going to be all right as a result of this. It's not mainly about all the murders, although that's a bigger component than he expected. It's - that Maitimo isn't here, and won't be, maybe ever. It would be very understandable at this point if he decided he never wanted to come back. If the Shadowgod could have made the marriage bond symmetrical then probably some combination of the Velgarth gods, maybe with advice from the Valar, could undo the marriage entirely. If Maitimo wants that then it's right for him to have it. Telumë decided a long time ago that this wasn't going to be a decision he had any claim over, or one he would even try to steer. He's relieved that Foundation thought letting Maitimo leave was a reasonable call, but honestly he would have leaned toward doing it anyway, just because keeping him captive here was awful and for a long time the alternatives were worse but that's not true, anymore, even if Maitimo somehow stays evil forever he can't bring Sauron or Melkor back and that caps the damage he can do and he's goddamned earned some freedom. 

The trouble is that it's almost intolerable to think about. Which is fine. They've won and no one needs Telumë anymore and he can afford to fall apart. He has to be able to think about reality, though, has to accept all the ways the future could go, including the ones where Maitimo makes the highly justified decision that he never wants anything to do with Telumë again. 

Probably part of the reason it hurts so much is that it's his fault. He made some very stupid and unconscionable mistakes and - they still won, that's the really important part, he didn't break the rest of the world too, but if it turns out he broke one of the things that's most important to him, personally, then that's a result of his own actions here.

He's not sure it'll actually hurt any less if he understands the other ways it could've gone, but it feels very important, that he try. That he find the parts of himself that were upstream of those decisions, and fix them, so that he stops being someone who breaks things just by existing near them.

...He's also not sure this is actually the kind of thing his god can help with, but he might as well try. Foundation?

Permalink Mark Unread

The vague sense of a shining city - something like Tirion under the Trees, he has that memory again, through Maitimo's eyes - draws nearer. It's always there a little, now.

What do you need?

Permalink Mark Unread

I need advice. But - on the past. Things that happened before you existed. I know you cannot trivially see that with Foresight, but if I give you the specifics I know... One of the things Foundation is built to do is to combine the kinds of knowledge people can have, particular facts and events, with...whatever it is in the fabric of reality within Velgarth that generates Foresight, that the gods mostly live in. 

Permalink Mark Unread

It takes a while to convey. The city-metaphor is hazy that far back, at first Foundation can't even single out Telumë's existence let alone anything he did, but Telumë was there and he can fill in that blurred outline. (The process of doing that involves some amount of gritting his teeth and crying, but that seems useful, actually, obviously he has some processing to do and that means thinking about it.) And then Foundation can show him some slightly-less-hazy points of divergence, doors that opened or closed, crossroads where one path was taken and the others withered. Foundation doesn't have to explain that it's very much a guess; they're not looking at the past as it actually was, but a reconstruction of it, running Foresight except backwards.

Most of the possible futures from the point of Maitimo's capture were ones in which he died.

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë can see that himself, he's becoming surprisingly adept at interpreting weird Foresight city metaphors. Yes, but he would have come back. Were those futures actually worse for him? Eventually, I mean, if you run it further forward from here, and look for where he recovers...

Permalink Mark Unread

Most of the paths where he died are much less recoverable than the one we are on now.

It's more complicated than that, the cityscape shows the nuances but also isn't something Telumë can put into words either. Some of those paths do eventually wind back to something fairly bright, but 'eventually' is a long time and the moment of the war ending is vastly more stark. Which he supposes points at the oath breaking with Maitimo in Mandos' hands, without a helpful Mindhealer to try to prevent it from ripping him to shreds. In comparison, the current path is one where the end of the war shows up much more subtly. An inflection point, but not a discontinuity. 

Permalink Mark Unread

And - were there possible futures where he ended up not exiled from Arda and with his father disowning him? Telumë has pretty wide uncertainty on how the other Noldor will feel about Maitimo when they come back, now that he's no longer oathed, but Fëanáro probably matters the most and Fëanáro doesn't exactly forgive people easily. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Some, yes. Though the paths where he could have both stayed alive and also in Arda were always very few and narrow.

The city shows a point of divergence. It's not at all clear from the structure what decision it was, but Telumë can guess.

Permalink Mark Unread

If I had not - taken the actions that resulted in us becoming accidentally married, then I could have sent him back to Arda with far more precautions, and he would not have had the trust he needed in the first place to betray it. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Yes. There are some paths there - though not all - where he comes to the end of the war both alive and in his homeland, with the love of his people if not their trust.

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë grits his teeth. That would have been better for him. Right? It feels like obviously it ought to be. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Foundation doesn't answer in words, at first, just moves their imaginary viewpoint further along through the city, showing a different starting point on the possible paths.

Actually it is not clear at all. Better in some ways, he would be much happier, but subtly worse in other ways.

That much is evident in the cityscape, though it's annoying hard to tell what the specific differences there are

Permalink Mark Unread

That makes no sense and is also kind of distressing for some reason. It's in tension, some part of him is pretty sure it has to be true that Maitimo deserves and needs his people and his home, and it's his fault that he lost them - not in temporary death but in permanent relationships and loyalty, he knows how much that matters to Maitimo, and he did something very stupid which is causally upstream of destroying that, and... (He doesn't know what his mind wants here, actually.) 

The limited Foresight angle on on his past decisions does make it look like they're on one of the better paths, right now, when it comes to Maitimo's eventual wellbeing. Not the best, but most are drastically worse.

Also it does still look like the path he actually ended up following starting from the point at which it was already too late not to get accidentally married, was one of the best ones - there are random variations there but not really due to his decisions - even though this feels very surprising given the level of messed up it ended up being. He had one lever left and he used it but it was a horrible lever, really, somehow holding Maitimo in a state where he couldn't break anything else for six months by, what, playing along with this awful dynamic where Maitimo's only goal was pleasing him, bribing him into behaving himself via their relationship, the one handle on Maitimo's motivations that didn't belong to Sauron...

He's starting to think that was pretty bad for him, actually, which feels like its own kind of awful thing to think given that Maitimo was the one actually being harmed by it.

Permalink Mark Unread

The last year was very damaging for you. At some point you are going to need to think about that, also, and not just how damaging it was for Maitimo. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He wants to fling back that he can worry about that after he knows Maitimo is okay, but - probably he can't, actually, and also in a way that's putting his own pressure on Maitimo to be okay sooner, which surely won't help. I know. He really isn't sure how. How to exist in a world where he's won, where he finished the thing his past self was trying to do all these centuries - it was too abrupt, too fast, he can't actually absorb yet that it's over - and also he broke something that he had never expected to have at all, maybe permanently - and also it seems like his entire core self of self is still built on Maitimo. And in some sense specifically on Maitimo loving him. Which makes it unsurprising how it feels like the entire world is falling to piece around him. It's not the world at all, it's himself

Permalink Mark Unread

You had to rebuild yourself under very bad circumstances, and in the process you came to value your relationship with him intrinsically, I think, alongside the eventual flourishing of all people everywhere.

Permalink Mark Unread

...Huh. 

It's not a lens he had on it before but it fits, actually. Telumë, waking up, didn't have enough of himself to remember what to point himself at, so he tried to point himself at everything Maitimo had stood in for, and in the process he also aimed himself at specifically the goal of loving Maitimo and being together with him. That...feels right, it makes the world seem clearer. 

And then, of course, he tried to pursue that goal with his usual ruthlessness, except that his strategies of doing things were never intended for romantic relationships, and also he wasn't thinking clearly at all, and he was failing to notice that he had two intrinsic values here instead of one, and...

Well, the biggest mistake, probably, is that he lost the ability to take a step back and notice the pattern of decision-making he was in, which on reflection probably happens a lot when he's very young in a new body, but of course he picked the worst possible week for it. And there was the horrific unknown unknown of Quendi marriage not working like anyone had thought, but it would still have been a mistake in expectation even if that weren't true, he thinks. Probably. It still feels like an intolerable way for the universe to be, to rescue Maitimo from Sauron and see him and know that they both still loved each other and not - let either of them have that even if everything else was broken around them - but probably that's the kind of insane reasoning that happens when you accidentally make 'having a relationship with this specific person' into one of your terminal values. 

And he needs to change how he's relating to it, somehow, because otherwise whether or not he can be okay depends too much on Maitimo and that's - still putting a kind of cage around him - and he's past the point where he's ever going to do that again. 

Thank you. Telumë doesn't feel better, really, but he thinks he feels less confused. 

Permalink Mark Unread

You are welcome.

Permalink Mark Unread

He moves on to a new village after a while, because the process of building relationships is more compelling than the process of maintaining them, right now, because he wants to try a different variant on the story of the war, because maybe one of these villages will have someone who can sing. On every other night he leaves and wanders off alone and tries to think.

He does not seem able to get anywhere by contemplating philosophy. Or - that's not true, he doesn't get nowhere, he's pulled a couple of things out into the open by doing it. He has a clearer picture of the overlap between Sauron's worldview and the worldview that could possibly be acceptable to everyone else. Sauron likes ambition, likes conquest, likes building things and doing things, likes inventing things. Hates death, and hates the pointless mundane troubles of the world. Melkor might've embraced them, said they were still suffering - Melkor gave all orcs intense ongoing pain mostly just because then things would be worse instead of better - but that's not really Sauron's style.

So that's something.

 

 

The thing Maitimo is increasingly tempted to do is go play around in Leareth's terrifying former empire. This is a stupid thing to do that will probably get him hurt in lots of terrifying ways but it feels like it'd use his skills and let him lean into a lot of the skillset Sauron valued in him without, actually, doing anything that was evil. He could probably make things less evil, even. It seems like there's maybe some kind of balance to be had, some kind of world where he keeps - lots of the aesthetics, some of the ruthlessness, some of the enjoyment of - no, if he's honest with himself he enjoyed having power for its own sake, being feared, even before, even if he wouldn't have used it readily - 

- and doesn't torture people, because he doesn't want to torture people very much, or he'd do it to himself more - 

- he does do it sometimes, usually with an apologetic bob in Telumë's vague direction first -

 

- and retains the aim of making all the worlds good places, and making them places where awful people can exist, and making something, someday, robust enough that Sauron can live in it. That seems like - the part that is the hardest to compromise on, from the direction of wanting people to like him and admire him and want to work with him. It's certainly the part Leareth can't compromise on, and - it feels artificial, and kind of icky, and kind of not-solid, to adopt it just on that basis, but - 

- but he knows perfectly well how he gets his values, he goes around being around people and letting them rub off on him. If he spends enough time with people who are good, then he'll slide in their direction, inevitably, by being called to take a stance on a hundred things he hasn't thought about before - he cares about bird death, now, something Sauron never contemplated in either direction - he doesn't have to change now, he just has to decide to place himself at the top of that hill, and give himself a nudge, and then gravity will take care of the rest of it. 

 

He moves on to yet another village and he doesn't do it. Two things are holding him back. One is that he's not sure he wants to. He has reasoned it out and it seems like the path to being able to do things again, to having a people again, to having resources again, and he wants all of those things, but he doesn't actually want it, and - maybe that ends up mattering. 

And the second is - who? He could go to Haven, promise some things under Truth Spell that aren't true yet but could be, help Treven and Jisa. It's almost certainly what he'd be doing if he weren't evil. But he doesn't know that they'll actually - rub off in the right direction. They're not shaped the way he is contemplating trying to be shaped. They're fine. They're just - not that. 

Telumë is. But he has no idea how to exist around Telumë right now at all. 

Vanyel?

Vanyel is probably pretty busy, and not with the kind of tasks that need Maitimo, and it'd be - painful to ride along being useless. He cannot stand the thought of asking for any favors, at any point in this - he needs to be earning his keep at every step of it or it feels like it will all come crashing down. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë spends a couple of weeks in his mostly-empty underground facility in the north, which slowly fills up again as people make their way back from various frantic last-minute staging points.

He thinks a lot about his conversation with Foundation and the couple of followups to it, poking more at the different choices a past him could have made, and eventually that doesn't seem like the interesting thread here anymore. He can see the mistakes he made from a dozen different angles, it's starting to feel like he has enough distance to look at the shape he was in, where his decisions in the moment were just water flowing downhill over a pattern that was already there, and he can spend a while jumping to being upset about the pattern and not the object-level mistakes but, again, after a while that feels like less the point. 

He goes and finds Vanyel. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Vanyel is still up north with Stef mostly because Telumë is, though also because he asked Jisa if they needed him and she told him to please take at least a month of actually resting, the war wasn't easy for all of them but the frantic final hours were mostly hard on him, she and Trev and Dara were all left safely behind at the staging-area.

Stef is getting pretty stir-crazy and has wandered off to do something else, so when Telumë traipses over to his room, looking about the same level of miserable he does all the time lately - he was kind of miserable the entire war but the weeks since they won have been much worse - it's just the two of them.

Vanyel offers him a hug. "What's on your mind?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

"...I am trying to figure out what shape of person I need to be." Telumë feels weirdly shapeless, in the core of himself, the stars are still there but it's becoming a lot more obvious that he's holding onto a memory that existed in the past and doesn't now; that he's trying to point himself at something not actually there to be pointed at. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Need to? Or want to? Because, I don't know, the first one makes me kind of nervous for you and the second one less so." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I have no idea how to figure out what shape I want to be," Telumë admits. Maybe he never has. It didn't feel like a deliberate choice, really, becoming the shape Leareth was before he ever met Maitimo, not the way a sculpture or a painting is a choice. It felt like - trying to build the only pattern that would work, he couldn't afford to be anything else because even pointing all of himself in the same direction might still not be enough. If you try to make the most beautiful glass it won't hold water, he remembers Maitimo describing it. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I guess I'm running into the same thing," Vanyel admits. "Stef isn't, he's fine, but I am. So much of my life has been about being someone who was really good at setting things on fire. And, gods, hopefully we're never going to need that again? But - I'm really bad at asking myself what I want, it turns out. And I can see that being hard for you too." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I would not have described it that way before; I would have said I wanted very straightforward things, and one of them was for everybody in the world to get to be all right, and - it did not seem that would ever be true unless I did something - and 'everyone forever' was a very big number so it outweighed the rest. But...I stop now and ask myself what I want and mostly I want things that would involve changing the past, which even my god cannot do." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I know." Vanyel is silent for a while, but when Telumë doesn't speak he goes on. "I want Savil back. I don't know if we can get her back. She died a long time before any of the conversations between the gods. I don't know if there's enough of her left to get. And - maybe we can make the future good, at least have everything that happens from this moment forward be good enough, but we can't rewrite what's already happened. We can only go forward."

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë nods. "I suppose I am trying to figure out what person I need - want - to be, for that part." Sigh. "I always hoped we would get to where we are - I thought it would be a better problem to have, this one, than the problems we had before. I think that is true? And...I always knew it would cost something unimaginable. And suspected that it would hurt, afterward." 

Permalink Mark Unread

Vanyel pats his shoulder. "I know. I think it's fine, if it takes us a very long time? And we have time, now, that's - one of the things you bought us. We kind of have to take our time, actually, right? Foundation and all the other gods ran very low on resources, in that fight, it's going to be years before there's much oomph there to go fix the rest of Velgarth. It'll happen, though. Even if neither of us ever does anything." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Never doing anything really does not sound very appealing." 

Permalink Mark Unread

Vanyel laughs. "I know! It really doesn't. And - I don't know, Maitimo said what a Quendi in my position would need was to go wander around and sing for a thousand years, which leaving aside the fact that I'd get so bored, doesn't actually feel like it'd - be the sort of nourishment I'm looking for? I don't know what would be. Stef wants to talk to everyone he can in Valdemar and write songs. Jisa and Treven have a kingdom to rebuild. I guess they could use my help, probably both of our help, but it doesn't feel like that has to be the thing I'm for? I sort of want to go back to Vinyamar for a while, where everything is beautiful, but I'm not sure that's what I want either and it'd be really sad, right, nearly everyone whose name I knew there is dead now and who knows when they'll be back." 

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë shakes his head. "I want to - build things. Only I am not sure what, yet. I want to build the kinds of things that made no sense to build, before we had won." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Extravagant luxuries, that kind of thing? Make somewhere around here just as ridiculous as Tirion?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë remembers a thousand glimpses of a shining city. "Not that exactly, but...something. And then I suppose we will have to move on and find all of the other worlds that need fixing and fix them too, but I was asking Foundation about that and they said it would really be a lot better if I spent at least a decade here. Also...things are not really good, yet? Things are going to be all right but perhaps they will get there faster if I am one of the people being clever about it." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I'm very sure of it. If you need to rest I think you should rest, but I know what you mean, that doing nothing isn't actually very restful." Vanyel smiles slightly. "Want to come with me to Haven? It got very rudely flattened and there's a lot of rebuilding to be done." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I will think about it. But - maybe." 

Permalink Mark Unread

He wakes up - no, not 'wakes up', he is dreaming - in Tirion.

 

 

He starts crying, and does not move.

Permalink Mark Unread

He's standing in a beautiful squash field, in a body that isn't his anymore. 

...Telumë is so incredibly not ready for this to be the thing that's happening right now. Maybe the dream will let them both stay in their respective locations and not even interact with each other? The dream with Vanyel usually allowed that, he thinks. 

On the other hand, he kind of wants to see Tirion again, under the light of the Trees, just to see if it really is like the other, metaphorical Foresight city that he wanders so often in his dreams nowadays.

Maybe if he starts walking but tries to curve around and miss Maitimo... It would help if space in the dream worked normally, or if he actually had any idea where Maitimo is starting out. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Eventually he hauls himself out to the gates of the city, but can't make himself leave it. He sits at the gates, looks back up the street to the palace, clings to the wall a little -

"Hey. Sorry, I wasn't trying to avoid you, I just - didn't want to leave the city -"

Permalink Mark Unread

"I wanted to see the city again." And - right, it would have a new association for Maitimo, wouldn't it, Telumë isn't the only one of them banned from all of Valinor. Maitimo has lost even more. 

He hovers just outside the gates. "...You would be perfectly justified in preferring to avoid me, though, we do not need to speak now." A month ago he would have been desperate for even five minutes of conversation. Now - there's a dull ache, there, but it's fine. Bearable. Whether Maitimo wants to talk to him or storm off or any of a dozen other things, all of it is tolerable. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I can usually end up perfectly justified in whatever I want to do, I'm very convincing." He doesn't move. "I don't think it has much to do with anything. I - gods, I'm not mad at you - scared of you, but not mad at you -"

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë gives him a slightly dubious look. He might actually feel better about this if Maitimo was mad at him, the fact that he's claiming not to be feels like the ground sliding under his feet. "I am sorry you are scared of me. Can I - do anything - that would help...?" He really doesn't feel very scary, lately. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I don't think so? It's just, I spent a lot of time training the habit, so it's still there. I could probably let a Mindhealer at it but I ...don't want to, they're all yours -"

Permalink Mark Unread

"I mean, not all of them in the world! There are apparently four others who have never even met me somewhere in Valdemar, and likely other countries would have them too. But it would make sense if you wanted nobody but yourself poking at your head." He mostly hasn't wanted Melody trying to fix any of the emotions he was having either. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I tried being mad at you and I ended up mad at you for not outmaneuvering me, which didn't seem like a helpful way to feel, considering that you would've absolutely outmaneuvered me if you hadn't had to spend so much time making sure I couldn't murder you."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Maybe. It is not like I had ever really tested whether I could outmaneuver you, before." 

Permalink Mark Unread

- this hadn't occurred to him; he looks slightly confused by it, or maybe by his own failure to think of it. 

He sends a thread of wantwantwant and then tries quite aggressively to quash it because that's a terrible idea - 

"Are you angry?"

Permalink Mark Unread

It's such a terrible idea, and for once the parts of himself are enough aligned and in agreement that it's not even really tempting. 

"Not especially? Not with you. I was quite angry with myself. Now I am...mostly not. It seems unlikely to help at this point. I was very angry with Sauron but then I - ate him - while possessed by a god, it turns out this is a rather effective method for feeling one has gotten one's revenge, it does not seem as though there is any further point in still being angry." 

Permalink Mark Unread

- grief -

"I guess that'd do it, yeah. 

 

I'm sorry I left without saying goodbye. I can, uh, guess that you're probably in really bad shape. But - I don't think I'm stable enough to help, right now."

Permalink Mark Unread

...It probably is sort of tactless to talk about his revenge on Sauron while aware that Maitimo's mind is still at least partly twisted into loving him, but - no, actually, Telumë is absolutely not in a place where he can pretend to be anything other than happy and relieved and very satisfied about the time and place of Sauron's ceasing to exist. 

"You need not be sorry," he says, wearily. "It - would not have helped if you had. And I am doing somewhat better now." Humans can put themselves back together pretty quickly when they have to. It'll be a long time before he's actually fine but he feels mostly like there's something solid in the middle, again. Something other than a version of Maitimo that doesn't exist anymore and probably won't ever exist in the future either, even when (if) Maitimo is okay again he won't be the same

He looks down. "I know that you - pushed yourself into a very strange shape, to be around me for the last six months, and it was very unhealthy for you. While I do not actually have any right to complain, here, I think I did something similar, and - until we both find different ways to be, probably it is not very helpful for us to be near each other, it will just reinforce that pattern." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"That was about what I figured, yeah. Probably longer for me, since - Quendi. And since - I mostly figured out what I want to do but I need to find people who can help me do it, and that feels like it might take a very long time."

Permalink Mark Unread

"That makes sense." And it's exactly the shape of thing he can't help with. Probably it would still be even if none of the specific mess had happened, just because when you're trying to decide whether to stop loving Sauron, probably the people you want advice and support from aren't the people who killed him. 

Right now it's mostly a massive relief not to have Maitimo around, not to have him constantly being Telumë's responsibility, to keep alive and as safe and undamaged as possible until the end of the war. (He'd sort of hoped the end of the war would feel more triumphant.) He can believe it, that it'll take Maitimo a lot longer, and that he may or may not spend years, maybe decades, desperately missing him. 

Permalink Mark Unread

- sad, maybe a bit hurt, lonely - "Can Foundation give you the ability to block the emotion-sharing? It's not about you, when I hurt myself."

Permalink Mark Unread

"I know. And, probably. I can ask." He hasn't asked so far, because - well, honestly, the reason is that he feels like he super deserves it, even though he's pretty sure anyone he said this to out loud would yell at him about it. "I would not want you to avoid it on my behalf. My productivity is much less critical now." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I know, but - mmmm, I'm trying to learn something and the fact I'm hurting you too makes it much harder to figure out -"

Permalink Mark Unread

Nod. "I will ask. If not I can go back to Vinyamar, the distance between worlds does not block it entirely but it is greatly attenuated."

He shakes his head. "I am sorry. I keep wanting to - shape the world to be better for you. It is very hard not to try to do that, actually. But I think I had better not do it, because - that gives you less space to steer it yourself. And I have done more than enough keeping you in cages. If at some point you wish to ask me to do things, though, the problem is not at all that I do not want to." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I want to do lots of things, together, once we're not hurting each other. I don't actually know that there's anything I want from you before that....

- you could acquire a country. Or build one from scratch, I guess that'd work fine too. I am very sad about not having a country and will cope much better if I at least married into one."

Permalink Mark Unread

Leareth finds himself smiling. "The north is not at this point a country but it probably ought to be one, since it is the main home of a new god. I do not really want to take over any of the existing ones... I suppose there is the Haighlei Empire, it likely needs to be conquered at some point since it is kind of terrible, but its local gods are also terrible so that will need to wait on Foundation being ready for another set of negotiations." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I am very patient." The emotion bond is betraying this as an utter lie.

Permalink Mark Unread

"I did fail to outmaneuver you enough to avoid the - things that happened - so even though I think anyone having to outmaneuver you is a very unfair challenge, I suppose I do at least owe you a country. It can be a very beautiful one." He glances across Tirion again. "That would not even be for you, particularly. I just - find myself wishing to build very beautiful things, right now." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"To be clear I don't actually blame you for - not outmaneuvering me - I tried being mad at everyone, just for practice, to see whether anything surfaced that felt like it might be important - I tried being mad at Vanyel but it was hopeless, how can anyone stay mad at Vanyel."

Permalink Mark Unread

"I know! Although I think Stef can pull it off somehow, it is just still kind of impossible to listen to them argue with a straight face." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I'm really not good at being mad at anybody. I wish my father hadn't disowned me but also I feel kind of like - I tried as hard as possible for an outcome, then it happened, what am I doing being mad about it -"

Permalink Mark Unread

"...I think this entire situation is very confusing, for that." Telumë carefully doesn't say anything about how he at least hopes Fëanáro will un-disown his son once Maitimo is no longer 'Sauron wearing his skin'. It doesn't seem like it'll help, yet - it seems like pressure... 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I guess so. I'm - sorry, that I hurt you, these last six months. I - knew I would, I wasn't trying to do it on purpose, if I'd seen a way to not do it I would've done that."

Permalink Mark Unread

"I know." 

Permalink Mark Unread

Sad. Lonely. 

He doesn't say anything.

Permalink Mark Unread

...He's starting to feel hopeful, like maybe this isn't quite as broken as what his imagination had been telling him, when he had less information. Still, he's pretty sure that the fastest route to fixing them is - figuring out how to exist on his own, as a person, without Maitimo there to lean on. 

"I want to walk around and look at the city," he says softly. "I miss this place." 

Permalink Mark Unread

- nod. 

"Go on."

Permalink Mark Unread

Then Telumë will nod to him, and turn and start walking, so that Maitimo doesn't see him cry. The gleaming city fractures into diamond-bright fragments through tears. It makes it even more reminiscent of the metaphorical city that's now nearly always in the back of his mind. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He stares down the street until it fades, and wakes up crying. 

Lonely, miss you, want.

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë wakes up in Haven, in a makeshift room in the outskirts, the part they're just starting to reconstruct. Wonders how far away Maitimo is, right now, and then curls up around his pillow and sobs. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Maitimo wanders, and sings, and meets people. He is not particularly careful about national borders but he is somewhat careful about not venturing into the territory of any hostile gods. He tortures himself, sometimes, but not very often. He concludes rather tentatively that torturing people is not that important, or he would be more motivated to do it when it doesn't get in the way of any of his other goals. He is not going to be unprincipled and believe something like that torturing other people is important. Sauron probably believed that but also, Sauron in many respects sucked. He has a list of complaints about Sauron, and reads them sometimes. They vary in how convincing they seem.  

He sings healing songs and crop songs and tells stories and doesn't have a hard time convincing people to feed and house him. He wears out his clothes and trades them for ugly human clothes and mopes about it for two months. 

Sometimes his head hurts and he doesn't remember why he ever wanted to do any things and he has to work very hard to act like nothing is wrong, aided by the fact that no one in these villages know how much time Quendi are supposed to spend sleeping. Sometimes he cries for months; he goes away from people, when that happens, tries to satiate himself socially by mindreading them from a distance. 

He sends Kalira letters with sketches of birds. 

He talks to Telumë, in their dreams. He asks about how his country is coming along. He walks him through Tirion, tells him about every building. Who built it, who lived there, what colors and flavors and holidays and plays they liked. 

 

 

Eventually he picks a place - in Rethwellan somewhere - and builds himself a house, from scratch, without using any tools he purchased or borrowed from humans. It is made of stone and wood and it has a little courtyard and a garden and it's beautiful, once he has all the flowers blooming. He blows some glassware, fits some stained glass windows, makes inquiries about importing silkworms, takes up embroidery. 

He is not ready to go home but he is ready for something to happen that will make him ready to go home, not that he's sure what it is.

 

Permalink Mark Unread

The first really happy thing that happens for Vanyel, a year or so after the victory, is that he finds out his sister is alive. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Lissa Ashkevron fled west after the resistance forces were defeated. Ended up pretty deep in the Pelagirs. Communication between Vales is iffy at the best of times and she had no real way of getting in touch, but news that the war was over reached her, and then some ridiculous new songs about her brother reached her, and then she started making her way back. She's leaner and older than he remembers, with the half-haunted look she had after the Karsite war, but she's still Lissa. 

Permalink Mark Unread

They rebuild Haven first. 

It's going to be a long time before the humans start coming back, the gods of Velgarth don't actually know how to make adult bodies, Foundation needs to talk to Mandos and then talk to all the other gods who actually had afterlife remit over the people. And King Randale might not be coming back at all, no matter how badly Treven wishes for it. For Jisa's sake if not his own. 

But he's a pretty reasonable King and Dara is a very good King's Own, and if it doesn't really feel much like Valdemar when there are only four Heralds left, at least it's not Sauron's country anymore. It'll be something new, eventually. 

Permalink Mark Unread

(Vanyel really hates the stupid songs, though, especially the one Stef wrote to make fun of him, he had the temerity to make it good.

Permalink Mark Unread

Jisa isn't really a Queen, officially, or wouldn't have been in the old Valdemar since she's not a Herald. She does a lot of the same work, though. When Melody comes back from Rethwellan a couple of years later, they try to piece together the old Mindhealers' Collegium that was just starting to exist before. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë bounces around between various countries for a while and eventually ends up back in the north. It wasn't a great place for a country before, due to being absurdly cold a very high fraction of the year and terrible for farming, but this is a lot easier to work with when Foundation can talk to the Star-Eyed Goddess and eventually trade to get the magic for Vale-barriers and other conveniences.

They build a capital city right on the coast, with a sort of blazing defiance, a Vale-barrier up around all of it so it can be a summer day while icebergs bump into each other outside. The city is a little reminiscent of Tirion. (It also occasionally reminds him of an unrecognizably abstract Tirion that Maitimo tried to draw once when incapable of spatial reasoning, what with the bubble around it and various experimental buildings that involve floating bits.)

Humans fortunately grow up quickly and Telumë doesn't have to spend that long running a country while looking like someone's teenage kid.

He talks to Maitimo in dreams, once in a while. The rest of the time he tries to anchor on a vision of his future that, while hopefully will someday have Maitimo in it, isn't built on that. He rereads thousands of books and writes some new ones and talks to his god, spreads the word for how everyone can talk to his god, and - he's reasonably happy, most of the time, at least after the first year. There's still something in him that isn't quite stable, but maybe that's only because the future doesn't feel known, yet, and he's leaving some negative space so that he can flow into whatever shape it ends up being. 

He spends a lot of time talking to his god. 

Permalink Mark Unread

It's not completely clear what Foundation is up to, even though they're a way more helpful than average god when it comes to communicating this! They're collecting information, mostly. Properly building out agreements with other gods, those who helped them come into existence and those further afield. And they're resting, because even the gods of Velgarth aren't unlimited in reach or power, and all of them came out of the final fight pretty overdrawn. 

...The main noticeable effect of Foundation's existence is that suddenly there are no inconvenient coincidences for matters related to rebuilding the countries damaged in the war, only convenient ones. Presumably lots and lots of people are having their own private conversations with the god. Children talk about it pretty freely; adults usually don't. 

Permalink Mark Unread

It's been a decade since the victory, Valdemar's population is still less than half what it was but there are a lot of children under eight, and apparently the Shadowgod is going to start trying to bring back some of the dead. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Mandos spent a while helping the Velgarth gods with their problems but returns to Arda after about three years. The Noldor dead start coming back after that. None of the people involved in planning the mass slaughter on Velgarth come back, not at first. Mandos is characteristically silent on why but the general assumption is that he thinks mass murderers will need lots of time before they're ready to return to the world.

 

 

Turukáno did not volunteer, when the Noldor went off to die, because he has an eight-year-old daughter. He rules the few remaining Noldor competently enough. Ulmo helps. 


When it's been ten years, he gets his brother back.

Permalink Mark Unread

         "Weren't you, uh, complicit in -" is the first thing the King of the Noldor says to his brother when he sees him, and then he feels awful about it. "I'm really glad to have you back! I just - I thought it'd be a while. We were bracing ourselves for - once we heard - Ages and Ages -"

"Mandos thought for a while to hold us until the harm was redressed, at least," he says. "It isn't, not yet, but that's - underway, now. And there's an argument, right, that the harms of - what the Noldor did here - are heightened, considerably, by long waits before we return - if we all died and all returned in the same day there'd be much less of a loss -"

        "I have made that argument but I didn't expect Mandos to buy it."

"He learned some things from the Velgarth gods, and they can change the passage of time, in their Halls. I think Mandos is using that to try to bunch us more than would be possible if we all had to heal at our own pace in real time."

          "Is Fëanáro back?"

Snort. "No."

        "Do you want to be King - does Father -"

"I don't. I don't know if he does. On the one hand you have a child. On the other hand if we pass the crown around like a throwing disc maybe it will be bad for the dignity of the office."

          "Itarillë loves this, actually, she takes audiences and she runs around scouting the city for problems for me. But if you want it - we're trying to let people take up their lives again -"

"And my life was being my father's very satisfactory heir who gets along with his terrible cousins and can run off to Velgarth whenever he wants and I would like to resume it."

         "The terrible cousins aren't back, unless they just got in with you."

"Maitimo's not in Mandos."

         "Maitimo's only one of the terrible cousins on a technicality. - I guess he's evil now? Is he still?"

"I don't know. I think I will go check."

          "Is he going to want to be King -"

"He's banned from the planet. Turvo, if you make a point of offering the crown to everyone but Fëanáro as soon as they start breathing it'll cause more problems than if you just go for, you know, general clinginess about it."

          "I guess that's true. I am not totally sure I won't offer it back to Fëanáro? Mandos only releases people healed, right? Do you feel very healed?"

"I told Mandos, and I guess he agrees, that the respects in which I still need healing involve - righting wrongs, talking to people. I have thought as many thoughts about this as I possibly can."

    

Permalink Mark Unread

 

 

(Through the emotion-bond Telumë is suddenly deluged, for weeks, in JOY and LOVE and MINE and EVERYTHING TURNING OUT MUCH BETTER THAN COULD POSSIBLY BE EXPECTED and LOTS OF OTHER FEELINGS.)

Permalink Mark Unread

Well, he isn't sure what that's about! It seems pretty good though! He could ask Vanyel if they Gated anyone in from Arda, because he has guesses, but on reflection he waits for someone to contact him and keeps running his country, which still doesn't have a name other than 'Foundation's country' even though it probably ought to at some point.

...He spends a lot of this time feeling vicariously delighted and also noticing all of the things that he's really proud to someday show Maitimo and maybe someday will actually be soon. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He stops by it eventually. It's pretty. 

How's Telumë?

Permalink Mark Unread

Well, they made the god and they won, that part was really good.

He admits that the first month after it was kind of awful - really the first year was - all right maybe several years were not great - but he built a country and several other countries rebuilt and the dead humans are going to start coming back right around now. Vanyel's sister turned out to have survived, somehow, that was one almost-miraculously good thing.

...Telumë himself is mostly pretty fine? He has a human-aligned god which occasionally possesses him with no warning to communicate things, that took a lot of getting used to, and he's - pretty lonely - but he's fine. He's really glad Findekáno is back. 

Is Findekáno being back pooooossibly related to several weeks of very loud JOY and LOVE that he's been noticing? 

Permalink Mark Unread

" - yes. I didn't think about that, I'm sorry. I am not pursuing a relationship with your husband. He was - really relieved to hear that Mandos is being sensible and people are starting to come back and people don't all hate him or anything - and I think he needed some hugs, very badly. He said you talk sometimes, in dreams?"

Permalink Mark Unread

"Yes. That is one of the marriage blessings." Awww apparently he's kind of disappointed that they're not pursuing a relationship, he still feels bad about that, but he can see why there's an argument that he and Maitimo should, perhaps, discuss that with each other first. "I did tell him several times that I was almost certain not everyone would hate him, but I suppose it would be more convincing coming from you, since you were just with everyone. - how are the others?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Maitimo's immediate family is mostly not back yet. We're up to about half of everyone else, though. There's a lot we lost, but - I think people are okay, for the most part. It has been expressed to me several times that we had better not ever have to do it again, so, I hope you like your god. ...Maitimo says he's much better than the Valar but also Maitimo wants to murder all the Valar so that's a low bar, there."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Half! That is more than I had expected. And - we do. It went about as well as it possibly could have. We are not going to fix all of the things instantly because Velgarth deities are somewhat slow; I think Foundation is faster, due to actually being able to talk to us, but nonetheless. The only reason we needed to do what we did was because of the time sensitivity. I think at this point, even if Melkor were to somehow return himself from the Void, we have a strong enough alliance of Powers here in Velgarth, with enough ability to run Foresight on Arda's magic," he has answered so many questions about it, "that we could win such a war without further sacrifices of that kind." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Good. I - know everyone did the best they possibly could, with the situation we were facing." Does Telumë want a hug?

Permalink Mark Unread

Definitely! "I am very glad you are back. I have missed your - common sense." 

(Another reason he thinks Findekáno and Maitimo should obviously keep having a relationship, assuming Maitimo wants to but Telumë would be very confused if he didn't, is because Fëanáro did have that particular piece of advice, and he is pretty sure neither of him nor Maitimo is very well equipped with common sense because if they were they would not currently be married.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

"It is good to be back. 

Are you and Maitimo planning to at any point talk things out? Are you both waiting for the other person to do that?"

Permalink Mark Unread

"...I hope we are going to? I was waiting for him to feel ready to do that and - I am pretty sure I said so to him at least once but it is possible it was more than eight years ago. We do talk, in the dreams... Did it seem as though he wanted to?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

"He said he is waiting for something that will convince him he's ready but he doesn't know what it is. I am not sure the waiting is doing anything for him. It seems worth having a conversation about, at least."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Thank you for telling me." He wonders when they'll next have the dream. It follows a less predictable pattern than the one with Vanyel all those years ago, although it's happened before soon after significant occasions. "What do you think of our city, by the way? I - find I miss Tirion, the dream is there and - Foundation's Foresight is reminiscent of it. I wished to build something that would be different, but still a reminder of it."  

Permalink Mark Unread

"It's lovely. It'll be - really good for him, I think. He's got a beautiful cottage in the woods but he's not really a cottage in the woods sort of person."

Permalink Mark Unread

"No, that was never the impression I got either. We have plenty of people here. I am fairly sure that none of them would hate him!" It feels a bit more like Arda. More...trusting, not all the way there - he's not sure he wants a world that's all the way there - but moreso than Velgarth before. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I think that you are the important one."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Well, I hope he is aware at this point that I do not hate him. I have tried to be quite clear about that." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"The thing he said was that, uh, he was sure he'd hurt you quite badly but didn't remember any of the relevant interactions and accordingly considered the ball to be in your court if you wanted him to form opinions about them."

Permalink Mark Unread

"I suppose if it ever seems like a good idea to discuss that..." Honestly it probably is, it did affect him significantly, he spend years noticing just how much. "I will talk to him next time we have the dream, and see what he wants to do at this point." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"All right. Do you want to show me the city -"

Permalink Mark Unread

"Yes!" And they can walk around for a while and look at everything, see the view of icebergs in the northern sea from the tallest tower. Everyone in the city seems to know Telumë, and they smile at him and he smiles back.

There aren't any shrines to Foundation, because Foundation doesn't actually need that here. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Probably at some point he should meet Foundation but he wants to focus on meeting this older, somewhat stabler Telumë first.

Permalink Mark Unread

And a couple of nights later Telumë wakes up in a beautiful squash field. (At this point, in the dream, he no longer ends up slipping back into Leareth's face and body, it took a few years to switch over but it eventually did.) 

He smiles. Starts walking. He finds that he's very much looking forward to the look on Maitimo's face, whatever it ends up being. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He is waiting for him at the gates. Singing.

Permalink Mark Unread

One of the things Telumë has been able to prioritize, after they won the war and things were a bit less hurried and Foundation kept telling him to take time for things other than work, is learning to sing better, so he can join in with harmony for a bit, he's not nearly as good as the average Quendi (or Vanyel and Stef) but he's a pretty good singer for a human at this point. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"How have you been."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Good! I just showed off the capital city of our country to Findekáno and he was at least moderately impressed. And you? I felt - you were very happy..." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"He visited! We didn't - uh, but possibly we should talk about - Mandos didn't fix him. I had been expecting that Mandos would fix him, he usually does do that."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Right." Telumë hadn't even thought about that, actually, he had just assumed... "Maybe Mandos decided that there was no need to fix things that are not broken. Honestly I thought you had resumed your relationship - that this was part of why you were so happy - and I was...a little disappointed when Findekáno immediately apologized and said you had not. I do not see what he would have to apologize for, you were together for a thousand years." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"The - circumstances of our marriage were very difficult - but that doesn't, actually, entitle me to ignore it? Especially since there's a chance it would happen again, and who your husband is married to is absolutely something you are entitled to a say in."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Well, if I am entitled to a say, then my say is that I would be fine with you also being married to him if that did happen again? It seems very fair. Also he is great." 

Permalink Mark Unread

- DELIGHT. 

"Well. Okay. If you say so. 

 

I don't think I care about who you're sleeping with? If you had children I would care a lot about that."

Permalink Mark Unread

...Huh. "I have not actually had particular interest in sleeping with anyone else. I missed you in particular a great deal, but..." Having children now - not because he has to, Foundation thinks they can just solve the problem of getting him a body that didn't used to belong to someone else before it comes up again, since Mandos taught the gods how to put adult dead people back into adult bodies again... It's a weird thought. Not necessarily a bad weird but...weird. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Well, you know where to find me - do you know where to find me? Findekáno managed it and he doesn't have any magic."

Permalink Mark Unread

"I do not, actually!" He somewhat deliberately made no attempt at all to keep track of Maitimo's movements. "Findekáno said that you have a beautiful cottage in the woods, but not where. I am guessing you have much greater osanwë range with him, and also nearly everything is very far from the north. What country?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Rethwellan."

Permalink Mark Unread

Nod. "If I travel there I ought to have range to find you, I think. I may not be able to come immediately since I am currently running a country, but...soon, if that is all right with you." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"It is."

Permalink Mark Unread

Permalink Mark Unread

- hug?

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë has a lot of habits, at this point, around - not touching Maitimo, not needing things from Maitimo, being...someone who can hold himself together solidly with or without Maitimo nearby - so he has to set all of that aside and think about it for a moment, but - yes, hug? 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I'm worried about - trying forever to have back something that - we probably can't. But I think probably there's a thing we can have that'd be - good."

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë nods. He's thought about this a lot, and–

"I am not completely un-worried about that, but..." He's thought about this so many times and it's still hard to put into words. Honestly the fact that he spends a lot of his time wandering through avenues of Foresight really hasn't helped his ability to talk about nebulous things by making words with his mouth. "I think we are both rather different people, now, and - starting from a different angle - and I think that if we go from here, where we actually are, and try to find - build - something good, it will... I am not sure if it will work but I hope that at least we can avoid becoming stuck trying to backtrack to a place that existed in the past and no longer does." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I hope so. I think I would like to build something."

Permalink Mark Unread

"I am glad. I think I would like that too." 

Permalink Mark Unread

 

He wakes up feeling scared, which is annoying, he thought he'd got past that. 

What is he scared of -

- that he can't do this, or won't want to once it's actually right there -

- that he has to do this, because this is the only way to ever get to do anything -

 

He goes outside. Sings. 

Probably if he wanted he could find some other interesting person who would protect him and help him accomplish interesting things. Probably if he wanted he could figure out how to do artifact magic and figure out how to protect himself against mind control and then he could do interesting things on his own without a protector - actually that seems like it'd be good for him even if he's with Telumë -

So he doesn't have to do this.

Does he want to?

 

He wants to move forward, he wants to stop holding himself in place, and it feels like he absolutely has to talk to Telumë to do that, there's too much of their history that's only in Telumë's memory, right now. It will be scary and it will probably hurt but he wants - to pull everything out and see it all clearly and then figure out what he wants to do with it. And probably what he'll want to do with it is fix it nicely for Telumë and then kiss him, since that's usually what happens when he is around Telumë, but it doesn't have to. The thing he's asking of himself right now is that they talk. 

And he wants that.

Okay. 

 

He heads into the village and tells children stories.

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë wakes up crying. 

This is inconvenient; he thought he'd processed all of those emotions, and - on reflection he still thinks so, it's taken a lot of work and hard conversations and times he's gone off alone to think and the end result is that he can separate out and name everything he's feeling, he's not lost in it or confused by it, he has clarity. It's just that a final step of actually moving on involves bringing that into the open with Maitimo, and he's been able to set that aside for years because it wasn't an option yet, but now it is an option and so it's hurting again.

And he's pretty nervous about the upcoming conversation. Nervous that they're inevitably going to hurt each other a lot; that as soon as he lets himself be vulnerable with Maitimo he'll fall back into the horrible configuration from before, needing something that doesn't actually exist and then flailing around about it. 

But they'll never be able to build something together if they don't sort out the foundation first. And he wants to build something with Maitimo, if Maitimo ends up deciding he wants that too. 

So he'll go to Rethwellan. 

As usual - more so than usual, probably - Telumë has set up the leadership structure around him so that it's not too hard to disappear for weeks if he has a day or two of lead time, and that even disappearing with no warning will cause a minimum of chaos. He has warning, though, so he spends a day properly handing everything over. He passes a message to Vanyel. He talks to his god. And then he Gates to Petras, which he's visited a number of times during the last decade. 

Maitimo? Is he in range? 

Permalink Mark Unread

Hey.

Permalink Mark Unread

Inconveniently, osanwë isn't directional. All right, where are you? 

Permalink Mark Unread

He can send an image of his little cottage. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Give me a moment. 

Rethwellan is the territory of the Shadowgod, which as usual means that in practice several much tinier deities have various bits of it, also there's some overlap with the Earth-Father and Sky-Mother duo that have territory in Hardorn, but in any case, it has one of the new magical storage structures, not exactly a Heartstone but still based on something that the Star-Eyed Goddess shared. He draws on it for energy. It's vastly easier than pulling on nodes. 

He Gates to just outside the cottage. 

Permalink Mark Unread

" - hi."

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë doesn't answer for a moment, because somehow, even though he's imagined this hundreds of times and he sees Maitimo semi-regularly in their shared dream, actually being face to face with him is resulting in a lot of emotions. Which isn't that surprising, he reminds himself. He's done a lot of refactoring the shape of person he is, but Maitimo is still his most important person by far. 

"This is very beautiful," he manages. "You built all of it?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I have a knife I purchased, metalworking is really annoying without magic."

Permalink Mark Unread

"I can imagine." And then Telumë falls silent and just looks at him, because suddenly he has no idea where they could possibly start. 

Permalink Mark Unread

 

"Did you ever get Foundation to stop letting me hurt you?"

Permalink Mark Unread

"We never figured out how to block it entirely but Foundation did find a way to make it very attenuated, and to see a few seconds before you were going to start doing it, so - it was basically not a problem." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I'm glad. 

 

 

I don't remember - almost anything of what we probably need to talk about. I'd smuggle myself a little bit of information, sometimes, if I thought I could get away with it. Whether you seemed happy. Whether it seemed like it'd be better to refuse to see you. But -"

Permalink Mark Unread

"I - gods - I am very sorry about that. I wish I had not felt it was necessary." He smiles crookedly, very briefly. "Although that is rather close to wishing you were less good at everything you are good at, and - I do not actually wish that at all. I never did. Even when you were evil and I probably should have." 

Something Vanyel pointed out to him, which surprised him a lot at the time but has started to seem true since then, is that most people wouldn't continue to be just as deeply in love with their partner if said partner were immutably acting as an agent of Sauron. Even Leareth would have been surprised to learn that his future self still loved evil Maitimo pretty much exactly the same amount as he had loved the Maitimo who was on his side. It seems like - not a very smart or adaptive way to have been set up, but it's the way he was set up, the reality he has to work with. 

...It's been a very long time since he did this, but Telumë shrugs and makes that thought public.

He's also not sure that the parts that hurt most were the times he was with Maitimo, although he does need to share those memories, if only so that Maitimo can have that chunk of his life back. For him, though, it's all the times when Maitimo wasn't there that still ache the most even now.

Permalink Mark Unread

"You don't need to apologize. I - it was necessary. I wish I'd been able to burn fewer bridges, not more of them. I do want it back, now, but - the ruthlessness almost never hurt? Some other things hurt, a lot, but not that. I have not at any point had trouble coming to grips with the fact you will hurt me to save the world."

Permalink Mark Unread

Nod. "I think the ruthlessness, there, was - the part of me that was the most Leareth? And...I am not sure but I think it might have been better overall, for both of us, if I had been more Leareth, and not," okay it's actually very hard to talk about this, "and not a traumatized child trying to hold together some of the pieces of him. I do not think it actually makes sense to apologize to you for - that - but I can nonetheless wish it had been different." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I think it would have been better. It would also have been better if other people had been capable of doing more, or if you'd had a way to break oaths, or if Sauron had never existed, but -" Shrug. "You worked with what you had.

 

And Leareth might've just killed me and I am glad you did not."

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë glances around for a place to sit down. Sits. 

"This is not the only way I have looked at it," he says, "and I am not sure it is the most useful way, but - one of the things that I did, afterward when there was time, was to use Foundation's Foresight, feeding in more human-level information I had, to - look at what would have happened in the various different paths. Where I made choices differently - where others could have done something else... I think all of the paths where you died were, while arguably much better for the war effort, also far worse for you." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"This doesn't surprise me. Especially -

 

- the marriage is the reason Mandos decided he doesn't need to fix all the gay people -

 

- and I think there's a problem I'd have had, trying to become less evil in Mandos - I really, really needed to be somewhere where no one was reading my mind -

- but it would, uh, be understandable if you wish you had not tried to put all of that on yourself while you also had a war to win -"

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë closes his eyes. After a moment, lets his head fall into his hands. 

"–I do not wish that, actually. I think - I think it was quite bad in expectation, that some of my you-related choices led to lower chances of us winning, but we still did win - it was salvageable - and... I ought to tell you some context, actually." 

This is the part he still struggles to say out loud. I came back, he sends instead, it's so nice having someone he can use osanwë with. I came back in a child's body a long way from anyone who could help me, and I - needed to put myself together enough to reach a records cache and then return to my organization - and the memories I had carried with me were so heavily of you. So I put you there. I - built the place where I keep my values out of you. And then... It would have been bad enough if you were dead. Instead of that, you were still alive but evil. Looking back, I am rather surprised that I managed to hold myself together as well as I did. 

Permalink Mark Unread


Oh. 

 

 

A pause. He is not sharing thoughts at all right now. He can't avoid sharing emotions but they're mostly that he is - very focused. 

 

That is not a complication I anticipated of seducing you! I would not have done it if I anticipated that! I'm very sorry!

 

Permalink Mark Unread

"...I am not sure if it was even primarily you seducing me. A number of the memories were from before that. I also rebuilt substantially off Vanyel but that was fine since he was eventually in contact with us." Just furious with Telumë for a while. "I think it was - bad timing, mostly, in terms of recovering from Angband. I was leaning on you very heavily for five years, and then I was - finally mostly doing well - but I think it was still fragile and still very reliant on you in particular and so it is not surprising that is most of what survived my death and reincarnation." 

Permalink Mark Unread

Nod. "So that's why it was so hard to say - you know, this is worse than nothing - even when it was in fact quite bad for both of us -"

Permalink Mark Unread

"I think so. And - why even now it is very hard to wish I had not put the burden on myself of - of trying to care for you in particular despite the circumstances being terrible for it even leaving aside that I was supposed to be fighting a war. And I think that was not the correct attitude to have in expectation then, given the downside risk if we had not won the war, but..."

What's he even trying to say, here? He switches to osanwë again. But it is the shape of person I was, for - upstream reasons that all make sense, that almost make it overdetermined what would happen... And afterward I could have decided to try to be - not that. To be someone who was aligned only on the mission of building a beautiful and flourishing future, and not also have the core of myself pointed at you in particular. But...

It still hurts so much. He lets the tears come. But we had won, perhaps not entirely, certainly not all of the worlds, still, enough that - it was not clear if it even made sense to point Leareth's ruthlessness at the shape chose to be going forward. And it still...feels...that I could not have brought myself to kill you. Not in almost any scenario. And I am not sure what I am even trying to say, here, just... Just that I love you and care about you, I suppose, and I did not at any point actually want to change that. And I think I am allowed to say that I think loving you is good. I think a number of the actions I took as a result were stupid, but - but I am not going to say that, in itself, loving you was the wrong strategic move. 

Permalink Mark Unread

 

 

"Okay. I ....think I understand. And - hmm. 

The main thing that I have been feeling, lately, is an acute lack of resources. I can't do anything at a significant scale in Velgarth without people looking out for me, because I don't have any magic or any meaningful defenses against it. I can't go home, not for a very long time. I am not entirely sure whether people ought to trust me enough to let me do things at large scales unsupervised anyway. So I keep - circling around you - as a resource I have here, as a way I can be safe enough to get things done, and confidently expect you not to get in my way - and so it's very reassuring to be loved and wanted and trusted but also that feels very unbalanced, I guess, if most of my feelings are about - safety and the ability to get stuff done - and most of yours are about me being at the very core of who you are - 

- I am not at all saying that I don't love you, just that I think I am thinking of my love for you as a resource, right now, and - and specifically tried very hard to build the core of my new motivation system without any reference to you because otherwise it was too easy to just let it be 'whatever you want' -"

Permalink Mark Unread

"That makes sense." It hurts to hear but it also fits. "I - am not saying this is still true, actually. I would not have felt comfortable coming to see you, now, if it were still the degree of true that it was then. You are still one of the things there, but - one among many. I am not quite sure what shape I will eventually be now that we exist in a world where I have already built my god instead of one where I am laying a millennium-long plan to do so. But I could become a shape that did not include you, that needed to be thinkable. I thought it would be very bad if I came to you desperately needing anything, that is - too close to the pattern we had ended up in and I do not want to nudge you at all toward letting your motivation system be 'whatever I want.' I would be okay if you - ended up deciding that it did not make sense after all for us to build something together. I would be very sad and I would not stop loving you but I would be okay. Probably that is still unbalanced..." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I don't know. I think there's a way it fits together but I am admittedly not immediately thinking of it. I wanted - I still do want - to help you, with figuring out who you want to be in a world where you don't have to be so tightly and painfully Leareth-shaped just to survive. To show you directions you could grow in. To make lots of those directions point towards me because it is wonderful, having you love me, having you discover what love is in my arms. But - but there's a whole class of things there that felt wonderful before we'd really actually hurt each other, and now feel really scary - 

- I can practically sort everything, really, either it's a feeling that's too impersonal like "I want to come home to Telumë because he built a beautiful city and I want to live in a beautiful city" or it's a feeling that would be a really bad idea to indulge like, like, wanting to play the games that we used to - do you even remember, I didn't offer you those back during the war -"

Permalink Mark Unread

"I remember a little. Enough that I - noticed, during the war, when I was keeping you prisoner, that it was...not something I wanted at all anymore. I - during the last six months of the war I was trying to walk a tightrope of giving you a space to exist where you could alive and as yourself as possible, which was - not very much - and also not keeping setting everything nearby on fire, and that meant - being in control, being the one who wanted things of you, so you could be that shape. And, I hated that, actually? It was very upsetting every time I noticed it enough to think about it. I want to never ever do that again. From what I remember of the games that we used to play, they were not that at all, but - enough resemblance on the surface - it just feels kind of awful now. I think the actual real memories of it might not be awful..." 

Permalink Mark Unread

Nod. "We used to both enjoy that you could hurt me, and obviously wouldn't, and that I could - tease you and confuse you and have everything go how I wanted even though you had all the cards - and now both of those facts about the world seem horrible and not cute or funny at all, and I'm kind of upset about it. Not in a way where I think we could possibly have it back, or should try, but - that is one of the things that I am grieving, here. That even if I let myself think about wanting you, I'm so scared of being manipulative - 

- I think I am having a hard time mapping a middle ground between being - manipulative, and unilateral, deciding what I want and steering you towards it, which I still feel like I know how to do, deriving my comfort and security from my confidence in my own ability to not let things happen that I won't like, expecting that you will let me do this because you are overcorrecting for the godawful mess that things were before -

- and, uh, trying to be honest and open and emotionally healthy by showing you enough of my head that my head stops containing plans that could come across as manipulative, which is what it apparently does when you have enough of a view of it -

- to be clear I am not planning to do either of those things! They seem bad! But when I try to imagine 'okay, how do we go back to dating', those are the plans I come up with, 'I engineer this and it's lovely and Telumë is happy and I feel safe because I decided what would happen and this is kind of fucked up but I don't have to care' or 'I try to be honest and emotionally vulnerable and then the parts of me that are interested in self-defense go away'. And once I reject both of those for being stupid and because I'm not interested in having a bad relationship anymore, I want to only have a good one, I end up - sort of floundering?

Uh, anyway, I was going to show you -"


And he sends some memories. He's so painfully happy in them, he's so delighted by Leareth, he's so delighted by confusing Leareth, by making him realize new things about himself, by making him discover what he wants - he's so delighted in his own invulnerability, in the emotional safety he can offer just by enjoying himself, he wants that back, even if the form it has to take is wildly different - 

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë remembers it and doesn't at the same time. There are a couple of moments that are very clear; the night Haven was attacked, when they were in the mountains watching the stars, is one of the brightest; but a lot of it is just a sort of smeared blur of wonderfulgoodhappy. It feels right, to have at least something more of that month back, and it also hurts a lot, and - suddenly he's crying. He wants to go back to what Maitimo said about trying to find a middle ground, but he can't, yet, something still feels very stuck...

I think that is one of the things I - could not quite move past on my own, he admits. Grieving it. I am - this is sort of hard to explain, but it is not you who I am angry with, or feel hurt and betrayed by. That would be very pointless. It was just - the world - you did exactly what made sense given your goals - but we had something that was so good and then reality destroyed it and we cannot get it back. Even if we can build something that is a different kind of good, someday. I want...

He takes a shuddering breath. I tried not to come here needing anything in particular from you. But - I think maybe I have spent the last decade waiting for the time we could - both look at it together - and grieve the thing that was destroyed - and I think, I hope, it might be easier to want to build something else after...

Permalink Mark Unread

That - sounds good. Can I hold you?

Permalink Mark Unread

He thinks about it. Tries to sit with the parts of him that are desperate for that, and the habits that pull away from it, and the part of him that's scared that needing anything from Maitimo will tear apart the fragile new foundation they're trying to lay down. 

Yes, he says finally. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Then he'll hold him, and he'll sing, a song he sang for Leareth but that Telumë probably doesn't remember.

Permalink Mark Unread

He doesn't, though it's sort of distantly familiar, and it helps him feel open, somehow - that this is finally the right time to stare at it fully...

I was so scared. I...was not afraid of you, exactly, although honestly I should have been. I was scared of Sauron. Of - what if Melkor did come back. I was terrified of failing, of losing, and - and it kept feeling as though it was completely impossible to do what I had to do - that it would be possible if I actually had you and instead I had almost you, except my enemy. 

And you must have been so incredibly scared as well - I know you were, I was reading your thoughts some of the time - and that feels very unfair, that we both were, and that there was still no way to - do something better instead. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I was really, really scared. Of winning, of losing, of having to destroy everything in order to win, of destroying everything and then losing anyway - of you looking at me, one day, and saying that this wasn't the person you loved, and telling Melody to go ahead and break it and see whether anything better grew back -

Permalink Mark Unread

He wants to apologize but that also feels wrong - he can just see it, instead, witness the things Maitimo went through that no one should ever have to go through, including the parts that were his fault. He doesn't think Maitimo destroyed everything but he aches for what was destroyed, and the fact that in some other possible world he could have prevented it. 

He's glad that he never did the last thing. It might have made things very complicated at the time, but now there exists a Maitimo who is still himself and that's good and he thinks it was worth the damage it caused him, personally, at the time. (He doesn't feel good about the fact that it might have negatively affected their odds of winning, but he's also not sure that it did; it was awful but all of the alternatives were awful too - if he'd killed Maitimo, he might have just fallen apart entirely...)

Foundation's Foresight thinks Maitimo's recovery would have gone worse if he still had the Noldor, if he could have gone back to Arda after they won. This doesn't make any sense to Telumë, but he's fed a lot of detail into it and it still comes out that way. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Worse for Foundation's values, probably. Because I wouldn't've had to get rid of as many parts, if I still had the Noldor. I spent a while - trying to figure out which bits of me I could keep and still function in a world that was basically good, and I bet I would've kept more if I had the Noldor.  

Permalink Mark Unread

That feels...sort of uncomfortable, actually. Like there's tension, there, in the fact that he both cares about Maitimo intrinsically and also wanted him back as an ally - as Foundation's ally - he doesn't think they can ever have the same flavour of trust in each other as before but he so badly wants them to build something new, and - it feels like that could be pulling things sideways, here, in a way he can't quite put his finger on.

Would you have preferred to be in that world, where you kept more of the parts? 

Permalink Mark Unread

I mean, no? That's what it meant to give them up. There wasn't any point in trying to - stay someone who was a grudging ally of good for my own advantage, it wouldn't work, you couldn't actually rely on me - I don't want to be supervised and that means it has to all be done internally - 

- but, uh, I do still have complicated feelings about the idea that I'd be a worse person if I hadn't lost everything -

Permalink Mark Unread

That makes sense. I am - right now I am feeling very angry with reality for being that way. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Yeah. Me too. But - I want to be on your team, there wouldn't be any point to trying to do this if I didn't think I was really in a place where I could be on your team. I want to be on Findekáno's team. I want to be on Vanyel's team. I think I am -

He's actually vaguely surprised that Telumë hasn't had more questions about whether he's still evil and how evil, and he sends that thought, the first thing he's sent that wasn't carefully put into words first -

Permalink Mark Unread

...Well, to a significant extent he knows Maitimo isn't working toward Sauron's values, or else it would show up in the Foresight footprint; there's more nuance, there, of course, he suspects Maitimo has held onto chunks, in a way where many people's ethical systems would judge him as a bad person. Telumë finds it hard to be upset by that, given that most people's ethical systems would have judged him to be a bad person too. 

I think we ought to talk about that. But - it feels important that you are the one steering you? I am scared I will - apply pressure - make it feel as though you have to pass a test, to be allowed resources and freedom, and I - just - that feels wrong? He's having trouble digging into why so he just leaves that uncertainty there. 

Permalink Mark Unread

There was an available motion where I - gave up on trying to have values about the world and decided to just work well with whoever is around me and that would've been bad for me. But I didn't do it. I can't say there wasn't still pressure involved, there was - the bare fact that I couldn't do anything with the rest of my life unless I ended up somewhere satisfactory to Foundation - but I feel like I got the chance to steer, given that. 

Some stuff I'm working with is - Sauron and Melkor don't like death. Death is - Eru's style. I don't like death, I want everybody to live forever. Including birds. 

I have this deeply rooted sense that torture is good, that it's - beautiful, and interesting, and a significant part of what people are for. But - but I don't actually torture myself very often, even though none of you would object. And that feels like it's for reasons that generalize? It's beautiful and interesting and all but also it sucks and I feel motivated to avoid it. ...I don't know if this is making any sense, probably your head has to start out very weirdly configured for this to be a reasonable line of reasoning -

Permalink Mark Unread

- weirdly it almost does make sense, at least in the moment that he's there in Maitimo's arms hearing it, but then it makes him go sort of cross-eyed trying to hold that up alongside everything else he believes, and he shakes his head a little. 

I am not sure, this is probably not related to how you got there, but - I could see that as carrying an argument I do actually just believe to its furthest extreme? A world that contained only people all experiencing exactly the same kind of happiness, forever, would feel - empty - even if it were a very good kind of happiness? I have a sense that a world with more things and more interesting things in it is better, though I do not feel that this carries as far as torture being a significant part of what people are for. 

(Actually that sort of conflicts with his worldview period, the sense that people are 'for' something in that way, instead of just...the beings they are, the world that is, taking each moment and being the sort of entities that push the future toward one they prefer.) 

Shrug. From my side torture is not even very interesting, honestly? I am still quite miffed that one-thirtieth of what I remember from my previous life is being tortured and - that is not a memory that contains very much useful information at all, I would much rather have remembered something else about Vanyel instead. Or Fëanáro, I remembered zero things about him and in my opinion he is much more interesting than torture.

Permalink Mark Unread

Maitimo pets him. I think that's part of it? That diversity of experiences matters, and intensity - and also there's an angle that I have decided to absolutely ignore for at least the next century that's, like, specifically enjoying letting someone hurt you - and also something about how games ought to have real stakes - but the point is, when I have internalized both the costs and the benefits of this experience under my worldview I don't actually end up wanting it very much, and that feels like evidence about how good it actually is. And I'm not - motivated to torture other people so I don't have to internalize the costs, it's not that kind of want. 

And I don't want Sauron or Melkor to have won because it'd be awful for everyone I love and probably result in me having less ability to do interesting things, in the long run. That one took a while but I'm there now. They might not have even let me have you. - I do still, sometimes, wish things had mysteriously worked out such that I got to keep you, without all of the other horrible implications of them winning. I could work on that if it were important to you that I not. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë's feeling here is that, while maybe it should bother him, it seems to not actually bother him much in practice - it seems pretty fair of Maitimo to wish that on some level - also, on some even weirder level, he's distantly tempted by it too, not in a way that cashes out as anywhere close to actually-wanting, but...there would be something restful in that having been the way it ended. 

Permalink Mark Unread

For a while it kind of felt like - the only route he could imagine to being with Telumë and being all right - which is silly, of course, because it wouldn't really have been all right - 

- but he wouldn't have been scared and he wouldn't have been alone - 

- also Telumë is a lot easier to keep than Maitimo - Maitimo apologizes for being so astoundingly difficult to keep -

- another thing he finds himself wondering about is what people have been told. It would be reasonable for people to all know that Telumë kept his husband as a prisoner and to figure that he keeps him now with just Foundation watching and an unknown amount of mind control but it makes Maitimo sad.

Permalink Mark Unread

Almost no one knows details? Findekáno and Nerdanel are the people he actually told, among the Noldor, though he supposes they might've informed other people. Both of him knew that his plan was to stop mind-controlling Maitimo as soon as there wasn't the downside risk of him somehow helping Sauron win. (He thinks Melody wouldn't have cooperated with any amount of that anyway, even if he'd thought it was justified.)

Most of the Velgarth humans, at least the ones in the Valdemaran government, knew at the time and also thought it was a horrible situation. Vanyel might've argued against just letting Maitimo head out on his own if not for Foundation, but he wasn't happy about the previous setup at all. 

Apart from that Telumë isn't really sure what people have said amongst themselves. 

Permalink Mark Unread

With the Noldor he thinks he can probably revise history very neatly, though it'd be a lot easier if he were there. Have it so he got married before he was evil. With everyone else - well. It's fine. It's a bit hard to even explain why he minds.

Permalink Mark Unread

It bothers Telumë a little, the thought of revising history around, it, but - on reflection it's mostly because he feels like he did something quite bad and ought to be held to account for it, because it would be wronging Maitimo further if he weren't, but - actually it makes sense for it to be up to Maitimo how he wants that handled. 

He thinks it makes sense for Maitimo to mind. If it were him and their positions were reversed, the thing he'd be feeling is - roughly that he wants them to be equals, and wants them to be seen as equals, and this seems harder if the circumstances of their marriage very much weren't ones where they were on even footing. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Maitimo does not particularly want Telumë held accountable for what he did and especially not in a fashion, that, yeah, cuts against the idea that they have a normal marriage and cuts in the direction of the vague Quendi prejudice that homosexual relationships are an abuse of power, because the desire for someone outside marriage goes hand in hand with the desire for power over them - 

- which is not zero true in Maitimo's experience but that doesn't mean it's a helpful attitude -

Permalink Mark Unread

It does seem, at this point, like it wouldn't add anything; in practice he feels pretty well held accountable by Vanyel and Findekáno (he's so glad Findekáno is back now.) 

So - finding something that does work. I asked Vanyel what normal people with normal relationships do and he laughed and said he was probably not the correct person to ask - maybe Findekáno would know - I feel as though there is probably a way we could sort of start fresh? As the people we are now, and, well, I kind of want to have a relationship that is not nontraditional amounts of confusing for a while, the rest of the world is confusing enough already. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I don't think Findekáno would either, what we did was got to be very close friends who desperately wanted something else, for Years and Years, I thought I was hiding it entirely successfully, until eventually after we'd been swimming naked off the coast of Valinor for a couple of weeks, on vacation, he said to me 'I mean, if you wanted to ruin my life you'd already have been able to figure out how', and kissed me.

 

 

I would be interested in trying to do something that is not confusing.

Permalink Mark Unread

We could...have tea somewhere? He doesn't really remember the times they had tea in Vinyamar, but it's mentioned in his notes, and he thinks some of them were after they started a relationship. The nice thing about having tea in the capital of my - our - country, is that nobody would mind about us being in a relationship. 

Permalink Mark Unread

That does sound nice. 

 

 

I need - no mind control, pretty much ever, if it's an emergency make it obvious and explain it right after. I would like to have a place where I live which you don't go to. I would like to discuss it if you want to marry other people or when Foundation is ready to resurrect any of your children. And then I think - I would like to get tea.

Permalink Mark Unread

That makes sense. I am having trouble thinking of any kind of emergency that would require using mind control on you but it does seem possible there are types of emergency I am not thinking of. 

It seems straightforward for Maitimo to have his own place to live (and a relief for Telumë, too, he feels like it might stay true for a long time that he needs periods before and after seeing Maitimo to find his balance.) The capital city, which still doesn't have a good name, has lots of new housing with nobody living in it yet, and also some areas ready for new building.

He's not in a particular rush; he can Gate over anytime, or he could come back later if Maitimo prefers that. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I should pack, but then I think I'll be ready to leave.

Permalink Mark Unread

Then Telumë will walk around a bit, if that's all right. He doesn't get to spend a lot of time in forests these days. 

Permalink Mark Unread

And he will sort his things by which are pretty and useful enough he still wants them, and fill one small bag, and then go find Telumë. 

I thought of one more thing I want! I want to import clothes from Arda. Human clothes are just not as good.

Permalink Mark Unread

You are completely right! We have some amount of trade with Arda at this point, it's picked up a little since the Noldor started coming back, and we could definitely arrange additional shipments. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Happy, optimistic, a little bit nervous. Want, which he suppresses but not quite as ferociously as he usually does when they talk.

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë raises a Gate to the permanent terminus right by the edge of the water (there are four Gate-termini throughout the city, including an enormous one for rapidly transporting large numbers of people or quantities of supplies, but this is his favourite. Even in late spring veering into summer, the waters off the northern coast are frigid and there are ice floes kind of everywhere, but the air inside the shimmering bubble-like barrier a few feet away is balmy.  

Permalink Mark Unread

 

 

Oh, it's beautiful.

Permalink Mark Unread

Maitimo should see the rest of the city! He's very proud of it. It's not quite as carefully-crafted as a Quendi city would be, the thing with humans is that sometimes one person wants to build a beautiful house that kind of clashes with the style of someone else's beautiful house next door, and you can't really tell people not to, it's their houses. But Telumë is pleased with it anyway. 

Permalink Mark Unread

It it good. It is a human city and not a Quendi city but that's - good too, in some ways, because human worlds feel like they will have more of the sort of robustness that is now one of his aspirations, the robustness that might someday let even Sauron live somewhere. And Telumë is so happy and that's pretty wonderful. 

(Pride. Delight. Want.)

Permalink Mark Unread

Everyone seems to know Telumë, almost to the extent that people in Tirion once knew Maitimo. It's less convenient because humans don't have osanwë and most aren't Mindspeakers, so they can't all talk to them at once and have to satisfy themselves with waving. 

There are lots of children. Some of them are jumping from one rooftop to another. It is not actually very dangerous here, Telumë explains. Unlucky things generally do not happen. Also it is very difficult to stop children from playing. 

Permalink Mark Unread

It is.

 

 

I'm so happy for you.

Permalink Mark Unread

I am very glad that we have been able to build this. I - feel a little as though I rebuilt myself along with this city. 

Permalink Mark Unread

That does not surprise me at all. It - matters, a lot, about you as a person, that you were right that you could do this and that it really is good.

Permalink Mark Unread

There were times in the middle where - I was much less sure of that. I suppose I fell back on knowing that my past self had been sure enough to begin, and that having Fëanáro's research teams assisting us would only improve the odds. 

Permalink Mark Unread

 

How was he during the war? Fëanáro, I mean.

Permalink Mark Unread

It was a long time ago and he wasn't exactly in a good place to pay attention to social things during that period, and also was mostly in Arda, but... He was very upset, obviously, about the Silmarils. He - seemed to hold together all right. I think Nerdanel helped a lot. You could talk to Vanyel or Stef, maybe, they saw much more of him. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Maybe. I don't want to seem like I'm - prying into things that aren't my business - but I suppose Vanyel and Stef won't agree that it isn't.

Permalink Mark Unread

I am not sure of Quendi, I suppose, but I think almost all humans here will agree that it is very much your business to hear some updates about your family during the war period. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Quendi will be more uniformly aware that they're, uh, not my family anymore. And that Fëanáro would probably resent anyone passing along updates.

Permalink Mark Unread

Your mother at least still wanted to hear how you were doing, so I cannot see that she would mind you hearing things in return now. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Those must have been - difficult updates. He squeezes Telumë's hand. Thank you.

Permalink Mark Unread

You are welcome. 

Telumë can point out some potential buildings Maitimo could decide to live in, at least temporarily if he wants to design his own house longer term, and then they can stop at a tea place, which is up in a vine-covered tower that directly overlooks the water. There are trees on either side. They've had almost a decade to grow plus magic to help. 

Permalink Mark Unread

It's beautiful and he's so proud and this Telumë feels so different than the scared kid he has, like, three interactions he remembers with.

Permalink Mark Unread

I will share all of those memories with you at some point, if you want them. It's going to be hard; he's really not proud of a lot of it, and also it includes a lot of moments when he was miserable and hurting. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I do but it seems like not first-date content, really.

Permalink Mark Unread

Definitely not! 

Telumë looks out at his city. Then back at Maitimo. He still feels kind of nervous, unsure of his footing, but - happy. Happier than he's been in a very long time. 

Permalink Mark Unread

 

 

He finds a nice house to live in. Makes plans to build his own, eventually. Goes on dates with his husband. He spends the dates trying to get Telumë to feel relaxed and at ease and in love, because that feels like the first part. Once Telumë feels safe with him, safe wanting him, safe planning things with him, then - then that itself will probably help rebuild whatever still feels like it might be missing from Maitimo's head. 

He meets the people in the city. Telumë knows all of them, and he's very very jealous. 

Findekáno visits. They talk. Maitimo is determined not to marry him until he has fixed his first marriage and is very annoyed that this rules out sex, too, at least until they know more about how that works. The people Maitimo would have advised to experiment are mostly still dead. It's still really good, having him around. 

He talks to the god, sometimes. It would be rude to get to know everyone in the city but the god, after all. 

He has a balanced range of hobbies. He studies animal intelligence and keeps up to date on all of the efforts to scout for other worlds. Humans sometimes kill their babies in the womb if they didn't mean to have them in the first place; Foundation is fine with this if they do it before the baby gets a soul, about six weeks along, but Maitimo thinks it is approximately the most horrifying fact he's ever heard so he's working on making sure it is widely available to women who want it. He helps a historian who is working on an account of the war with Melkor in Arda.

He gets pretty tired of not having sex with his husband or his boyfriend. He doesn't bring this up with Telumë but he probably catches flickers of it. 

He hardly tortures himself at all.

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë has definitely noticed it at this point! 

It's - hard - because it seems like at some point in the last decade, almost without noticing it, he's drifted back into, well, mostly not thinking about sex very much. Earlier on that was deliberate, it was obvious that wanting something he couldn't safely have was only getting in the way of his goals and making things more complicated, and then maybe it just became his default way of being again, falling back on centuries of habit, he's not sure. He loves Maitimo, a lot, it's not like he ever stopped missing him, and - it is starting to seem as time passes like it might be safe again now, and that's definitely the goal, right, just...

Probably they should talk about it or something. For their next planned date he suggests they go sit out in a particular spot in a garden near the water, obviously they can have private conversations anywhere with osanwë but it still feels right to have a corner to themselves for this conversation. 

Permalink Mark Unread

That sounds good. The garden is lovely and the water is lovely and Telumë is lovely and it's super weird that 'not caring about sex' is a mental move Telumë can make, it is extremely not a mental move Maitimo can make, he tried for several centuries.

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë shifts closer and leans his head on Maitimo's shoulder. Touching him is very good, again, but he thinks mostly in the way it was before they were actually in a relationship, not that he still has those memories from his own side but he has notes on it.

I think it is probably easier when one is repeatedly starting over in a new body and - expecting it to have habits and traits that are not actually 'you'. It just seemed like an annoying distraction for a very long time. It does seem like there were some lifetimes where I had more casual relationships, I found notes on it when I looked, but...I must have decided eventually it was not worth it. Shrug. That was then. This is obviously different, just, I - think on some level I must be afraid that wanting it will only cause me to make insane decisions again. 

Permalink Mark Unread

That makes a lot of sense. 

 

I am tempted to say we could try practicing - starting and then stopping before we do much of anything - to establish that there's that nice feeling of being out of control but there's not, actually, a loss of control...but if we are going to do that for a long time I want Findekáno here probably because I've done it before and it's amazingly distracting.

Permalink Mark Unread

That makes sense. Telumë is quiet for a while, thinking. I really miss falling asleep with you holding me. I had one particular memory of that, from before. He thinks it's probably from not very long after Angband although the actual memory-fragments he kept didn't come that well ordered. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I would enjoy that.

Permalink Mark Unread

We could...just talk about doing things, maybe, without actually doing them yet? Probably we ought not talk about things that would be a bad idea to do, but - you could tell me what you miss doing, if you want, and maybe if I can grab onto the memories of it better it will start to seem good again. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Okay.

I miss it when you'd touch my hair. I spent so many years feeling badly about how you clearly did not understand the Quendi thing about hair and then you got to touch it and then you understood and it was very satisfying.

Permalink Mark Unread

I really did not understand the hair thing! ...I have a memory of you doing my hair in a very elaborate braid for some reason and being very smug about it? Did that really happen? 

Permalink Mark Unread

- yes, it did! I don't think I even explained myself at the time - 

- I did it saying that you were of the House of Curufinwë Fëanáro - complicated emotions there but he brushes them aside - that you were mine -

Permalink Mark Unread

I want to be yours. His own emotions there aren't uncomplicated, exactly, but it's the truth. I missed - that - I missed it very much.

Permalink Mark Unread

You are mine. You don't - have to let me touch you, to be mine, if that's still not really where you're at.

Permalink Mark Unread

I mean, I am literally marriage bonded to you. 

...Huh. This might be the first time he's remembered that fact, held it in his mind, and pretty much only felt happiness about it. Which in itself feels sort of sad and unfair, like it should have happened in circumstances where it could've been a happy event from the very beginning, but he's rehashed the past enough already and it's not going to change. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I wish I'd gotten out alive, somehow, and been there for you when you came back to life, and we'd discovered it - maybe still by accident - together, fighting for the same side, and had some awkward conversations with the Quendi research teams I was helping you coordinate, and had a party after the war. 

 

But - the pieces of that which will matter in a thousand years - did happen. We won. And we're married.

Permalink Mark Unread

Do you want to have a party at some point? To his own surprise, it feels like something he would like. I suppose if we do, we ought to wait until all of your family are back. 

Permalink Mark Unread

And until they have decided whether to forgive me. But at that point - yes, I would.

Permalink Mark Unread

Mmm. 

Telumë is noticing that he feels a little like he owes it to Maitimo to be okay with Maitimo touching him, that he's wronged him enough and that it's really only fair for Maitimo to get to have sex with his own husband at this point, but - probably that isn't a healthy way to be thinking about it. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Well, it's not what I want. Even in the world where he won, he hadn't been planning to settle for that. 

Permalink Mark Unread

That makes sense. If the thing Maitimo wants is for Telumë to actually just want it too, that's - harder - he can't really at this point choose which emotions to have the way he can just choose what actions to take, but it does seem like a far better eventual state. It seems likely he'll get there naturally, at some point, he already wants to see Maitimo and show off his city to him and watch sunsets together and cuddle him, and -

I think I would like it if you kissed me. It doesn't have to be now, but an advantage of kissing in a place where someone else might wander in is that they can't really take it any further, which makes it feel safer. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I will keep that in mind, he says, and takes his hand, and doesn't kiss him just yet. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I love you. The sun is going to set soon; the sunsets are very pretty here, all the colours sparkling off the ice in the water. Do you remember when we watched the first sunset in Arda? 

Permalink Mark Unread

Vividly. It was so beautiful. You were so happy. It seemed like - you were starting to find yourself again.

Permalink Mark Unread

I was watching you see something for the first time - I was happy because you were. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Overwheming sadness about the exile from Arda, which he mostly tries not to let bleed through too much, it's off-topic -

I don't know if the Valar would have thought of it if not for contact with Velgarth. But it's such a good idea, the sunset.

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë senses some of the sadness - feels a little bad for bringing up that topic - but it's going to be hard to avoid, so much of their past together was in Arda. He squeezes Maitimo's hand. We saw a mountain sunset in Velgarth, right? I only really remember the part with the stars, watching through your eyes...

Permalink Mark Unread

The day you died, yeah. He can send it; climbing through the mountains, watching the sunset from within their shelter on the mountains, laughing, talking -

- and then Leareth Gated them back and collapsed into Maitimo's arms, comfortably tired, and then -

Permalink Mark Unread

Oh - was it the same day...? Telumë doesn't have records of anything from their visit to Velgarth. He would've kept them, presumably, but of course everything in Haven was lost. 

He's suddenly crying. Remembering, faintly and distantly, how angry he was with himself, in those final frantic moments, for taking that risk, letting himself arrive anywhere too tired to fight, even the peaceful and well-protected capital city of an allied kingdom, he remembers how stupid he felt, for forgetting that Velgarth was always, inevitably, trying to destroy him...

Permalink Mark Unread

He leans over closer and hugs him. Sauron was watching the whole time you were in Velgarth, for you to be tired - when we Gated out they brought Iftel's army across the border, under Sauron's illusions which the Web couldn't detect -

Permalink Mark Unread

They had pieced together that it must've been something like that. Telumë remembers Vanyel telling him not to feel bad about having failed to see it coming, no one saw that attack in particular coming, they'd had no idea any nearby countries had armies that could take out Haven even with a Maia's help. It's almost worse, to think that it happened even though no one made any mistakes...

But it's in the past, a lot of bad things happened but they've won now, and it's time to start looking to the future, start building something new.

Permalink Mark Unread

'they've won' is, inconveniently, still on the list of thoughts that provokes awkward conflicted feelings from him. He resents the empathy bond for how he can never just tuck those away for later, how he's always sharing them.

 

But - it is over. He doesn't really believe that nothing awful will happen again, but it can't happen with no forewarning, Foundation ensures that.

Permalink Mark Unread

No - they live in a world where awful things can and do happen, Telumë knew that even before a lot of them in a row happened to him personally. He wishes this wasn't such a painful topic for Maitimo, or at least that he were better at being mindful of it. 

But, yes, Foundation substantially strengthens the forces working for not-awful things. Probably at some point they'll go to other worlds that still have problems, they can't hole up in this one forever, and - probably awful things will happen at some point. He supposes all they can do is try to grow and be strong enough that it won't break them. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Maitimo definitely does not at this moment feel they are strong enough that additional horrible things wouldn't break them but - 

- he can imagine it? It feels - related to the wanting to build things robust enough even Sauron could live in them, actually. They can make something that evil gods can't break. 

Permalink Mark Unread

That makes sense. And, no, I think we are not there yet. I think we will have to work for it, and in the meantime it would be better to stay here where we have some amount of safety rails. But...someday. I want that kind of world to exist too. I want us to build it together.

That feels close to the core thing for him, what it even means for him to love Maitimo; it means a lot of other things too, including, hopefully, having sex and enjoying it and making each other absurdly happy, but at the centre it means making each other stronger. 

Permalink Mark Unread

That's - what loving people is, yes, making them stronger and helping them notice their strengths and putting them in situations where they get to exercise them and earning their trust, from it, so that when you need them for things, there they are. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Oh no he loves Maitimo so much and is suddenly full of warm overflowing happy feelings about it and - all right he should probably ask. I want to kiss you, may I? 

Permalink Mark Unread

He leans over and answers that by kissing him.

Permalink Mark Unread

The sun sets over the ocean, turning the icebergs purple and blue as they float past, and nobody bothers them, and Telumë is so happy - he remembers to share some of his thoughts with Maitimo, for the first time ever he's a little annoyed that the empathy bond is only one direction. 

Permalink Mark Unread

It annoys me all the time but I try to remind myself that as long as we're in the same place I don't need it to know you are safe and happy. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë snuggles up against him. What he wants, right now, is to head somewhere private so they can do more than kiss, which is surprising, he's not sure when wanting that snuck up on him. It seems like a good sign but also like it would be wiser to hold off and take things more slowly. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Maitimo puts an arm around him. 

I'll come back if you'd like, to hold you while you fall asleep. But - that's all, tonight. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I would like that. Want to walk back with me to my house? Telumë lives a good distance from Maitimo's interim home, but it's on the way, pretty close to here. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Yes. He takes his hand.

Permalink Mark Unread

And they can walk back together through the streets of Telumë's city, where everyone knows him and most of them now know Maitimo too, and smile and wave to them happily. 

Permalink Mark Unread

And get back to Telumë's house - Maitimo is sending wantwantwant but his body language is much more cautious than that, he kisses Telumë's forehead very gently -

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë leans into his touch for a moment and then pulls back. I love you. See you later tonight? 

Permalink Mark Unread

All right. He is confident in his ability to spend the evening here and not change his mind but perhaps it's still smarter not to push it. 

 

He goes back outside. Sings. It is an old and fairly nuanceless Quenya ballad about how the singer's beloved is the most perfect person in the universe. Maitimo feels like he has more evidence for this than most people who sing this song.

Permalink Mark Unread

(Telumë would probably disagree if he were listening, which he isn't right now, because he's talking to Foundation instead and catching up on some news.) 

He osanwë's Maitimo a few hours later, standing by his window looking out at the stars. They're very clear, this far north, if not quite as bright now that the city has more lights at night. I am going to bed soon, if you still wanted to come...

Permalink Mark Unread

Yes. Can he make the leap up to the window - of course he can, things don't go horribly wrong, here -

Permalink Mark Unread

There's a nice little ledge to grab onto, and Telumë laughs and opens the window for him. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He climbs on through. Folds his arms and frowns consideringly at Telumë. "You're very trusting. Why, I could've been anyone."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Is that right? Well, I trust everyone in my city, so while I would have been very confused if some other random neighbour jumped up to my window right as I was inviting you over, I would not exactly have been in danger."

Permalink Mark Unread

"But what if I was a bear. You cannot possibly trust all of the local bears."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Bears do not generally have Quendi-shaped silhouettes. Besides, Foundation would ensure it slipped and fell if it were intending to harm me." 

Permalink Mark Unread

Hug. "Do you want me to sing you to sleep? Or just hold you?"

Permalink Mark Unread

"Maybe just hold me. If I fall asleep too quickly I will not be able to appreciate it properly."

Permalink Mark Unread

"A good point." He climbs into Telumë's bed and reaches out for him.

Permalink Mark Unread

And Telumë slips into his arms. It feels oddly more like coming home than entering his house has for the last decade. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Wantwantwant -

"I'm really kind of annoyed with the empathy bond. I apologize for it being very rude. I firmly intend to hold you and watch you fall asleep and do nothing else. - maybe nibble on your ear a tiny bit, once. But immediately afterwards make a joke so it doesn't change the mood."

Permalink Mark Unread

"It is all right. I like that you want me. That is - not the scary part." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"You're scared that you will want me back. And if you do, I will tell you no, not tonight, and be very pleased with myself because I have never done that before in my life and I think it'll be good for me."

Permalink Mark Unread

Awww. Telumë closes his eyes and snuggles up close in Maitimo's arms and focuses on how happy he is that for such a long time he didn't have this and now he does, and that would be enough, all by itself - he can want more, eventually, but Maitimo is here and loves him and wants him to be safe and happy, and that's enough.

Nobody knows this fact because nobody has actually slept in the same bed as Telumë ever in the last decade, but it turns out that he makes very cute noises as he's falling asleep. 

Permalink Mark Unread

...awwwwwwwwww. 

Hopefully this JOY and AFFECTION and DELIGHT will not wake him up.

Permalink Mark Unread

It makes him wiggle a bit and make sleepy happy noises which are even cuter but then he does fall asleep the rest of the way, relaxed and breathing slowly. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Maitimo will not keep his attention here with Telumë all night (there are eyes to look through, things to get done) but he will keep his actual physical body here cuddling him until he wakes up.

Permalink Mark Unread

He wasn't expecting that, and it's - confusing, at first, he comes half-awake and tenses because there's something unexplained and different from usual, and then relaxes again because it's okay, it's better than okay, and he twists around in Maitimo's arms and snuggles up against him. Good morning!

Permalink Mark Unread

- do you wish me a good morning or mean that it will be good whether I wish it or not - Olórin is still dead but probably not forever, no one has to be dead forever - this is not snuggly conversation at all - 

Good morning! You make adorable noises when falling asleep.

Permalink Mark Unread

Do I? I was unaware of that! I suppose I am not sure who else would notice. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He sends them, along with a great deal of affection.

Permalink Mark Unread

I suppose that is adorable. It is also very ridiculous. You had better not go around telling people or it will ruin my dignified reputation. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Are you telling me I have blackmail material? I want to cash it in for...breakfast. Fruit and a pastry. If you arrange this I will keep your terrible secret.

Permalink Mark Unread

Fine, I suppose that you have sufficient blackmail material on me to demand breakfast. I will go see if I have either of those here. He disentangles himself, with some reluctance, and gets up. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He stretches out in Telumë's bed and - a flash of emotions that must be tied to a memory he doesn't even have, because every time he remembers watching Telumë get out of bed and go away has been fine -

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë stops in the doorway, glances back. Are you all right? 

Permalink Mark Unread

Yeah, of course, sorry. I don't even - that didn't have any attached reference at all, I don't know what it was, but I'm fine.

Permalink Mark Unread

It was probably something you do not remember, then. We ought to go through all of those memories at some point. It's not that ridiculous a quantity, even, six months of seeing Maitimo every week or two, or even less often. And the weeks of interrogations, of course, they should go over that even though it sounds miserable and stressful for both of them. Anyway, I love you and I promise I am about to come back, with breakfast. 

And he's indeed back several minutes later. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He is sitting cross-legged on Telumë's bed, singing to himself quietly.

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë puts down a plate with some fruit and pastries on the bedside table and sits down beside Maitimo, putting an arm around him. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Hug. "I really don't like how the empathy bond -

 

- you gave me a thought-protective amulet once mostly because it wasn't useful, how much the knowledge you could read my thoughts was constraining them - I am very tempted to start doing the same thing with my emotions, getting them to be more convenient - but that's not the place where I like to intervene on myself, right, I like being able to act how I choose and feel however I feel..."

Permalink Mark Unread

"I would also not like for you to feel you had to do it - or to end up doing it whether or not feeling you 'have' to is accurate. I like knowing how you feel, but...only because it is a true reflection of you." He frowns. "This might do the opposite of help, but - what would you think about it if the empathy bond were symmetrical, and I was also sharing my emotions unfiltered? The Shadow-Lover offered once. To try making a bond from my side as well. He offered during the war when it was the worst idea and would not have solved any of our problems, but I always thought, maybe someday..." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Huh. ...maybe? I mostly feel like I know anyways, but - it'd at least stop feeling -"

Sure, he'll just try sharing thoughts. He has feelings about the bond being one-sided. It helps that the magic-senses are sort of the opposite, but - in general the bond is a magic fact about Maitimo belonging to Telumë and there is no symmetric magic fact at all and - and Maitimo has been very decidedly steering this relationship away from anything that reminds him, at all, of that, because it will be a long time before it stops being interwoven in his head with the absolute conviction that it is unsafe to think about anything other than what Telumë wants from him.

Permalink Mark Unread

All of that makes sense. Telumë hasn't felt like the bond itself is necessarily a fact about Maitimo belonging to Telumë rather than the other way round, but...also he really does want to belong to Maitimo, he wants Maitimo to feel like that's true. He's concerned about the downsides of a standard Velgarth lifebond, but Quendi marriage bonds have somewhat fewer downsides, and he actually talked about this with Foundation a few years ago, in the abstract. 

"I think I would like it," he says. "It ought not be a rushed decision, but...it would make me very happy, to feel as though I were even more properly married to you." 

Permalink Mark Unread

Hug. "We can keep thinking about it. But - maybe someday, yeah."

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë leans on him while they eat, mostly quiet, deep in thought. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He doesn't have much to say either. 

 

Eventually: "I want to do this again tonight."

Permalink Mark Unread

"I would like that." Telumë leans in, very gently, and kisses his cheek. "Would you join me on a walk by the water around sunset? We could climb the big tower again and see the view." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I will think about it." He kisses him back. "Hmm - yes."

Permalink Mark Unread

"That cannot have been very much thinking, I am concerned you are not treating our date night activity with the weightiness it deserves, but - oh, I suppose I will take it." He stands up. "See you tonight. I love you." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I love you."

 

 

There are some mood swings during the day but by sunset he is calm and happy and affectionate. They can go walk around the edge of the water, look out at the icebergs, climb the tower. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë leans over with his elbows on the rail around the tower's rooftop, looking out at his city. Was something bothering you today? 

Permalink Mark Unread

Maitimo will stand beside him and rest his head atop Telumë's. 

Just thinking through how sure I am of things I'd want to tell you I was sure of, stuff like that. 

Permalink Mark Unread

That makes sense. I was worried maybe... What was he even worried about? I think I was worried that maybe on reflection you did not feel good about spending last night with me. 

Permalink Mark Unread

No. I enjoyed it very much. And in fact one of the things I want to assure you of is that - that I have put enough of me back together I'll just leave, if I need to, that we don't need to be afraid we will make any mistakes worse than that. I feel very sure of this. But I was trying to - poke it, trying to figure out whether you might accidentally scare me enough I could be wrong about that - because I don't want to assure you of it if I might be wrong - even if wildly unlucky coincidences mostly don't happen here -

Permalink Mark Unread

I understand. Is there a particular shape of thing I might do by accident, that would scare you? Whether or not it would scare you enough to - be bad in that way - I would rather not do that to you. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I know. Lean. I trust you. There's - the fairly obvious? If you threatened me or if you used magic at me or if you - told me how to conduct myself in your company - I would get upset. You won't do that, so I have spent no particular effort addressing that. There might be - random words that I feel like I've heard before, or the feeling of staying in your bed while you go away to do things - I think I don't like that, and should get up too - but I don't think you should reasonably be trying to avoid that. I would - rather be here with you and some bad echoes than lonely someplace that reminds me of nothing.

Permalink Mark Unread

All right. I do wish for us to be able to talk about it, when that happens. Also I am wondering if we should actually schedule some times for me to share memories with you? Possibly not at the same time as date nights, it might be mood-ruining. 

Permalink Mark Unread

We should probably schedule that. Later this week?

Permalink Mark Unread

That seems good. He proposes a time, earlier in the afternoon so that they could take a break after and still have some evening together if Maitimo wanted, although of course it's fine too if he ends up not wanting it. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Then they can plan on that, and try to think about less upsetting things until then, like how Telumë's city is pretty and how Telumë is pretty.

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë is so proud of his city and especially of the fact that Maitimo likes it even though it's not quite up to Quendi aesthetic standards. He's never considered whether he's pretty, actually; this body is a pretty reasonable one, he thinks, he's pleased with it, but he doesn't exactly spend a lot of time on his appearance. 

Permalink Mark Unread

It's pretty. Maitimo likes it much better now that it's not a child's - he used to spend a lot of time reminding himself that this was Leareth, and he doesn't do that anymore. Pretty eyes and a pretty nose and a pretty smile. And someday, when they're both ready, Maitimo will learn how Telumë looks safe and relaxed and happy, and he expects it will be very very pretty.

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë feels a surge of wanting, and starts to shove it down on instinct, but manages to relax into it instead. To just sit with it, without moving, and to notice that it feels good, to want Maitimo, even if fully giving into the feeling still doesn't feel safe.

The sun is brushing the horizon, the light golden and slanting. Telumë leans back into Maitimo's arms. I want to talk about - where we should set the limits for tonight. 

 

Permalink Mark Unread

That sounds like a good idea. Petpetpet.

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë considers it for a bit. 

...I think I would like to play with your hair, he says finally. And have you play with mine, and stop there - oh, that reminds me. I had in my notes that you wished my hair was more sensitive, or could be sometimes at least. Foundation had a suggestion about that. To Telumë's shock, at the time, he really hadn't thought it was the sort of thing his god would happen to have advice on. There is an herb-tea that heightens sensations in general. It probably has other effects, though, so I would want to try it first by myself at some point, to know what to expect. I think that combined with the song you know could make it close to equal with how Quendi hair is. 

Permalink Mark Unread

- giggle. I guess Foundation is earning his keep after all. I would enjoy that, tonight. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I am glad. We could watch the rest of the sunset here and then go back?

Permalink Mark Unread

I can probably wait that long. He kisses the top of his head. 

The impatience he is unintentionally letting Telumë get a read on is not, mostly, about there being more sunset before they can go home. It's mostly about - he doesn't really like planning in advance. He trusts himself to figure out what's good for them and not go farther than that, and he needs to be able to trust himself on that to do anything at all, so this feels like the form without any of the substance, when it comes to not making stupid mistakes. But it's important for Telumë. The way Maitimo trusts himself works differently; the way Telumë trusts himself works like this, policies set in advance and careful negotiations. Which is why he would disguise the impatience, if he could, and since he can't he will misattribute it. 

I feel like the sun could stand to set a bit faster.

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë has a suspicion that it's not just about the sunset, but he lets it slide. I would say you ought to make a complaint to Foundation, then, except that I do not think they actually have the power yet to move the sun. It's halfway down now, painting the water orange and pink. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Yet? Is that the sort of thing the gods could do in principle, eventually?

Permalink Mark Unread

Possibly! Or something we might have the power to do ourselves, even. Although the straightforward way of doing it would involve just spinning our world faster, so the entire day would be shortened and not just the sunset. 

Permalink Mark Unread

That seems like going a bit far, really, but who am I to say.

Permalink Mark Unread

Maybe. Telumë snuggles up against him, watches the sky until the sun slips below the horizon. We could go back now? 

Permalink Mark Unread

He kisses him. I want to carry you.

Permalink Mark Unread

...Sure. Be careful on the stairs. It sounds very nice to be carried. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Then he will scoop him up and carry him back to his home, careful on the stairs, not that anything bad will happen. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë relaxes, leans his head against Maitimo's chest, listens to his heartbeat. I feel very safe, he remarks eventually. I like it when you carry me. It tugs at memories from a past life, where nothing bad had happened– well, actually a lot of bad things had happened, but not to them togethernot yet. What is it you like about it? 

Permalink Mark Unread

I like holding you. I like that people will see and - it won't destroy our lives at all, it won't even be the main thing I see in their body language next time they see me - 

I like that even with all your magic there are things I can do that you can't -

Permalink Mark Unread

That makes sense. Hmm - most people in the city do not know anything about our marriage, obviously, but I think many of them are very happy to see me with someone. I had a neighbour a few years ago who thought I must be lonely and kept trying to set me up with people, it was rather adorable even if I was not interested. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Awwww. And maybe a little bit of very ridiculous jealousy. It's one of the things that always made me saddest, that all I could ever have was - secrets -

Permalink Mark Unread

It was one of the things that upset me, early on in Arda. Obviously I do not remember it but I did have some notes. It seemed very unfair. 

Permalink Mark Unread

You were so determinedly indifferent about it! It was very bizarre! In hindsight it was probably mostly your habit of assuming gods have bad reasons for everything they do but I don't think we ever talked much about your history on Velgarth so it didn't make any sense to me at all.

Permalink Mark Unread

I think that, and - well, Vanyel has suffered substantially in his life due to humans who disapprove of his sexual preferences, even if the gods here clearly do not. And it is such a pointless and stupid reason for someone to be unhappy! Some sources of misery are very hard to fix, but this one is only the result of what people believe, and a false belief at that. It bothered me there too. And...I suppose it feels wasteful to me, when people focus their moral outrage on who other people are having otherwise perfectly healthy relationships with, instead of the many, many bigger problems the world holds. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I don't actually know of any gay, otherwise perfectly healthy relationships, he wants to object, but doesn't. Probably by now Vanyel and Stef have wholly outgrown their odd start; he should go spend time with them sometime.

I feel very silly, for assuming it was just how the world was and wouldn't change. If I'd encouraged people to go for it, maybe we would have discovered a long time ago that it doesn't work the way the Valar thought. Of course, then I wouldn't be married to you, which would be very sad.

Permalink Mark Unread

I am sure I would be fine but, yes, that would be sad. I am very pleased to be married to you. 

They reach his house. It's locked with magic, one old habit of paranoia that hasn't died even here, in probably the safest city anywhere in Velgarth. Telumë can unlock it without Maitimo having to set him down, though. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Whenever Telumë does magic he feels it and shivers just the slightest bit. But then he can kiss him and carry him up to his bed.

Permalink Mark Unread

And it's Telumë's turn to be tangled for a moment in some current of emotion, an association with something he doesn't directly remember. He thinks it's from his previous life; Maitimo has never carried him home and to his bed in this one. But he can't think what - none of his notes have anything about a bad thing happening related to Maitimo carrying him somewhere, though they might not go to that level of detail.

He leaves the thought public; he's sure Maitimo noticed something was wrong, and it feels bad to try to hide it, even if it's not something that particularly matters. 

Permalink Mark Unread

So many ghosts we're dancing around - 

He holds him still and tries to think what it might be. 

The day you died? 

Permalink Mark Unread

Maybe. He has that memory, now, albeit sort of weirdly since it's from Maitimo's perspective. Telumë takes a deep breath and tries to relax again, to focus on being here, now, with Maitimo, in a place they have much stronger reason to believe is actually safe. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He carries him up to his bed and sits down. Cradles him. You, too, deserved better from your world.

Permalink Mark Unread

So did all of the other people in it. And - at least I finally made sure that someday - not yet, not everywhere, but someday - none of the children born here will need to deal with that. Thinking about it now isn't exactly helping him stay in the moment. There are tears in his eyes. I am sorry to be so maudlin today. I can...try to be more in the mood. 

Permalink Mark Unread

No. No. I - I think probably there are a bunch of things other than sex we need to work through, and we shouldn't be aiming for a particular order, there. And it is probably going to be really hard to segregate the good stuff and the bad stuff. And that's fine.

Permalink Mark Unread

Mmm. I - think right now I just want you to hold me. To know that - I belong to you - and we are working to build something together. 

There were so many times when this was exactly what he wanted, and it was one of the things he couldn't have even thought Maitimo was there, and it felt like reality taunting him, it felt like Eru taunting them both, and he leaves that thought public because one of Maitimo's Sauron-flavoured comments on Eru seems like it might be weirdly comforting right now. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He holds him. 

I kept trying to find - angles on it, ways I could give you that - but 'we're working together on not forcing you to kill me' doesn't have quite the resonance, right - 

 

- I was cheered at one point by the thought that Eru does seem to eventually decide he's had enough of pointless tragedy, because nothing awful has happened to Vanyel since he made it to Arda. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I know. It is complicated. And on some level he feels bad about it, almost, like it's greedy to want something that specific, and that difficult to achieve; probably almost no one has that, really. And, huh, I had not really noticed it but Vanyel's life has contained fewer awful things than the previous baseline. ...Though I think he did find this war to be very awful to endure, particularly the very end. 

Permalink Mark Unread

It must have been. Though - 

- in a way much less ugly than how you'd originally planned it, I think -

Permalink Mark Unread

Perhaps. It was very rushed, which was not ideal, but - in the end, less than five million human lives were lost, which was much less than the original estimate. It is not as though we have figures on the exact total. Perhaps we never will. Helpless shrug. I suppose one might say it was less ugly because Sauron would have killed them otherwise, but I am not sure that makes any difference, they are still dead. Hopefully not forever.

He still feels especially bad about Jkatha, a country with no existing alliance or relationships, taken out in a fiery blast without consulting any of its human political leaders, there was barely time to consult its god, and he isn't sure if all of the lives lost there will be coming back. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Consulting the human political leaders doesn't feel at all relevant to him. It says something touching about Foundation, that he tried to ask, but human political leaders don't seem relevantly entitled to choose these things for their citizens; Quendi leaders are, he thinks, but only barely, and that earned through thousands of years of service that lets Maitimo guess offhand who among the Noldor would have volunteered and who wouldn't have.

On the other hand it seems much less ugly to him because Sauron would have killed them anyway; it changes how people think about Foundation's rise, from something accomplished at their expense to something accomplished with lives doomed anyway. It would be - painful, to be under the dominion of a god who claimed your whole family in its rise to power; people submit to conquerers, but it's a hurt that doesn't go away. It's different, if the god was part of the desperate plan to avenge them. 

Permalink Mark Unread

That makes sense. It tells a very different story. I think I would not feel differently, if I were one of the people to be killed, or one of the people losing my entire family; I think even my very young self would not have. But - most people are not shaped like me. 

And even he isn't entirely that shape anymore; he can still understand his past self's feelings and choices, but a growing chunk of him does understand how and why this way was less ugly. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Huh, I can believe that. Maitimo is more stubbornly shaped that that, he thinks, he would have resented conquerors however noble their intentions and however noble their actual results, maybe resented them more if they were in some sense in the right. He used that, actually, when he was wrestling with the oath - he started out by asking himself to imagine that Leareth had done this to him, not Sauron - as the simplest way to get the Noldor to stop fighting, as Maitimo had once been afraid he might - 

- there was a Maitimo who agreed with that Leareth about pretty much everything, and he would still have bitterly resented him. Would've wanted to not work for him, just on principle, once he had a choice. And that turned out to be a useful point to start from, when he wasn't able to look head-on at the question of whether he still wanted to work with Sauron -

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë thinks he understands that. He would've predicted it at the time, even, if more from outside-view priors than from a deep understanding of the pattern there. And, hmm - he would have done it anyway, if it had seemed like the alternative was Melkor winning in Arda, or even just a lot of Quendi dying horribly. He would have known that he was permanently sacrificing something, giving up the possibility of a true, unforced alliance. (He's very glad that he ended up deciding it wasn't the best path.) And, well, probably at least some of why it wasn't the best path is related to what Maitimo's pointing at. That people would bitterly resent it, and it would be reasonable of them to. 

...Now his mind is off trying to imagine the hypothetical scenario where Sauron instead tried to get Maitimo's help the honest way, just by being very very convincing, and he's not sure why it feels like such a ludicrous concept but it does. 

Permalink Mark Unread

- giggle. I guess Melkor kind of tried that with you but it didn't work well enough to encourage repetition. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Now he's giggling too. And Melkor cheated! A lot! I think you could have done better on the first try. Which is maybe sort of frightening, but also he's never been able to feel negatively about Maitimo being competent at things, not even when they were very solidly and inevitably on opposite sides and it was horrifically inconvenient. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I could have! I remembered thinking so when I watched him, that it was impressive for a Vala because they usually can barely have human interactions at all but that I wouldn't have needed more than one try. ...would've held Sauron's alliance with Vkandis together, too. He doesn't feel regretful that it didn't pan out that way, not right this minute at least. I am very useful to Team Evil. 

Permalink Mark Unread

You are very useful to anyone lucky enough to have your help. I love that about you. I remember how - every time you did something very clever, even the first few times when that very clever plan was 'nearly murdering me', I would miss you so much more... 

Permalink Mark Unread

It was a gesture of respect, you know, how hard I tried to murder you. I knew that if you made it back to your people then somehow, eventually, you all would manage to win.

Permalink Mark Unread

Well, then I feel very respected, he sends, as lightly as he can. He finds himself wanting Maitimo very badly, right now, and he isn't sure how to feel about the fact that this seemed to arise when they were talking about dangerous situations and fighting each other. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Well, it was like that before anything, so I wouldn't think it's a - hurtful pattern all by itself. And it doesn't bother me. And you're beautiful - he is aching with it -

That said I'm not going to, tonight. You didn't want to earlier and - that's not how I do things exactly, with policies and precommitments, but it is how you do things, and so it is how I shall do things I'm doing to you.

Permalink Mark Unread

I know. I appreciate it. I think I mostly did not need to do things that way before, and probably at some point I will not need to here, just - I need to feel more calibrated in myself first. He hesitates. May I play with your hair, though? We said that could happen tonight. 

(He's aware in the back of this mind that this is something they did when Maitimo was his prisoner, quite a lot of times actually, and so it's likely to have associations linked to memories Maitimo doesn't currently have, and he ought to be mindful of that.)

Permalink Mark Unread

Yes, we did. And you may. He changes positions on the bed to enable this.

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë starts undoing Maitimo's braid, occasionally bending to kiss him. 

Permalink Mark Unread

And Maitimo melts obediently against him and gasps and reciprocates kisses and feels - safe, and small, and - maybe a little confused but not in a way he's paying a lot of attention to -

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë pauses after a few minutes.

(Mostly for his own sake, because he does remember all the times they did this, and the now-very-uncomfortable feeling of being - completely responsible - of trying so hard to square the circle of doing what Maitimo wanted and needed, when both of those were so firmly tied up in 'exactly what Telumë wants', when the thing he was attempting was sort of impossible from the beginning but still the only way he could think of to keep Maitimo alive - and he knows pretty much for sure now that the alternative was worse... He keeps those thoughts private, he'll share them later but maybe not right this second.) 

Is this all right for you? 

Permalink Mark Unread

Yes, he says contentedly, and then lifts his head and narrows his eyes at Telumë - are you all right -

Permalink Mark Unread

Yes, I just - needed a moment. Maitimo making that expression at him helps a lot, reminds him that he's here-and-now and not in the past; that he, in fact, trusts Maitimo not to let him keep doing anything if it's bad for him. He loves Maitimo so much, loves seeing him relaxed and happy. He resumes. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Cooperative expressive happy Elf.

Permalink Mark Unread

He enjoys it for a while, and then some movement or expression must be suddenly too close to something from before, and he freezes. 

Permalink Mark Unread

- he reaches up, pulls Telumë's hand out of his hair - sits up - 

Hey. It's okay. I love you. I'm here -

Permalink Mark Unread

I know. He shivers. I am sorry, it is just - for a moment it felt too much like - having complete power over you - and then that felt very bad. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He kisses his forehead. Frowns. In hindsight it seems like obviously a good idea to, uh, participate more - given what we're working around - I am not sure why I didn't -

Permalink Mark Unread

Unfortunately I do not have clear memories from when I was Leareth, to know whether that is just what it is like when you are enjoying yourself a lot?

Permalink Mark Unread

I was enjoying myself a lot. It was different? But not wildly different and we -

- we have done this on four occasions that I remember, counting the marriage, I'm not generalizing from very much -

Permalink Mark Unread

Was it that few before the war? My surviving notes were not very specific. Anyway, I - am fine now, I just - I wanted to be certain that you were not too distracted to notice if something were happening not how you preferred it; I am worried that you might have some sort of implicit habit here, to be very cooperative? I think that if we talk a little in osanwë during, that will address it on my side. It does not need to be a conversation with particularly interesting content. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He takes Telumë's hand and winds it back through his hair, very deliberately, without letting go of it. Kisses him. Moves Telumë's hand for him.  What if we do it like this.

Permalink Mark Unread

I like that. It's different and new and it's a good idea, he likes it when Maitimo has clever ideas...

Permalink Mark Unread

Then they'll do it like that, with Maitimo radiating 'smug' and 'pleased with himself' as well as 'safe' and 'content' and 'happy'. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Having those new emotions in the mix helps the most, really, he loves Maitimo being smug; the emotion-bond is really nice when it's pleasant emotions keeping him informed on a moment-to-moment basis that his husband is having a good time. He wishes it were two-way, at least right in this moment - he can compensate a bit by making more of his own delighted thoughts public...

Permalink Mark Unread

His husband will get himself off with Telumë's deftly-manipulated hand and then want to cuddle, possibly with Telumë mostly pinned, petting his hair very gently. Happy - content - safe -

 

 

"I don't know for sure and getting the memories back might help but - hmm, I think I decided that - being wholly and uncomplicatedly cooperative was not just safer but also a part of our dynamic I was more willing to poison than anything else. It might've hurt less at the time, if I'd - done more banter - but -"

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë doesn't mind being mostly pinned; he kind of likes it, even. "That makes sense. I am not sure it would even have stood out to me as different, at the time? Since I remembered so little. I do hope having the memories back will help you figure out what was going on for you, even if the memories themselves are from my perspective - I hope that will not be too weird..." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I am good at reading people secondhand. - that's how I extended my osanwë range in Arda, when I knew everyone within range had been apprised of the situation and had people talking to them about whether I'd said or done anything, I eavesdropped until I knew some strangers well enough to be able to reach them well out of range -"

Permalink Mark Unread

"We had wondered that. We did not really prioritize finding out the answer, since initially you were exempt from Truth Spells about it and afterward you were– well, it became moot. Actually, do you know how we proved to the Valar that you did it, and how Jisa and Stef got away? It seems fair for you to know, at this point." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"They tracked down the people I'd talked to. I was using them to set some other traps so I hadn't tried to get them to hide their involvement, being brought before the Valar didn't seem particularly worth avoiding anyway. I don't know how Jisa and Stef got away."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Well, the most important part is that they had Companions with them. Including the Groveborn, Rolan; I am not sure if you ever interacted with him, we suspected your osanwë range on him would be short, but his Mindspeech range is ridiculous. Stef had been bringing Rolan over to Valinor in secret, occasionally, he would ride in to read your thoughts, which is not mind control so it was not among the things we negotiated not doing." 

Permalink Mark Unread

" - huh. I guess that'd work. Where did Jisa get a Companion."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Technically Rolan is Dara's Companion, actually! They just started swapping around and letting others ride them, once there were so few Heralds and Companions left. Another useful trait of Rolan's is that his attention works more like Quendi do than like humans, so he could track all of your thoughts and sense-inputs, which a human Thoughtsenser would be overwhelmed by. He is honestly a lot more like a Maia than like a person." 

Permalink Mark Unread

" - huh. I did try only doing important things while I was also doing a dozen other things - and I was constantly doing surveillance near the traps to see if any of them sprang, it was exhausting -"

Permalink Mark Unread

"Yes, that was what they noticed. They were already very on guard, and then Rolan saw you switch your attention to the birds, and they did not know what you were planning but they bolted. And got enough of a head start due to being on Companion-back, combined with Jisa's magic. They persuaded the Valar to let Rolan testify in secret to avoid revealing his existence to you, in the case that would matter again afterward." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I wasn't particularly expecting you all to keep your promise once I'd tried to kill Stef and Jisa. I'm glad you did - your word, and the circumstances under which you're known to keep it, is really valuable, I'm glad I wasn't able to force you to handicap yourself for the rest of forever like that - but I wasn't expecting it."

Permalink Mark Unread

"I think Stef would have really liked to Truth Spell you, I am sure he pressured Vanyel about it, but - Vanyel understood what I had promised and why, I think. I am not, as I have said before, a very good person in normal terms, but I do avoid breaking my promises." Slight smile. "I mostly avoid making them in cases where they might end up being inconvenient, but you rather outmaneuvered me, in this case. Still, fair is fair and I had agreed." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"And if you weren't the kind of person who kept your promises it would've gone much worse! Which is what being the kind of person who keeps promises is for." Kiss. "I had all planned out what I was going to say about what had happened and it was very well crafted and would get me many things I wanted and it made me feel sick, every time."

Permalink Mark Unread

“I am sorry.” He’s both morbidly curious and probably doesn’t actually want to know. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Don't be. I - I think in some senses I was the only adult in the room, and I was trying to destroy everything. And whatever it is you were trying to do, you hurt yourself very badly. I don't want to keep - holding that - I don't want to retain the option to cut you with it ever again -"

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë shudders, leans into his arms. “I could have - been an adult about it - if it had happened even a year later. I think I am probably not usually much of an adult yet, when I come back into the world remembering about thirty thingsI can relearn it much more quickly than most people, since my records are so compressed, and I keep some habits, but...there was so little time.”

Permalink Mark Unread

Snuggle. "I think I knew that. Or - was figuring it out. I wasn't expecting - to have an interaction that wasn't under the truth spell, with the front you put up when you don't want to feel things - I remember waking up with my hair loose and feeling so surprised - that you hadn't sculpted me off of yourself the second it was inconvenient -"

Permalink Mark Unread

“I think I would not have done that even if I had still been Leareth? Because - I wanted to win and part of why was you. Because you had taught me how to care about people by caring about one specific person very much.”

He frowns. “If I had been Leareth, as an adult, I think I could and would have kept up the front even though you were right there, missing me and being lonely - I would not have tried to solve that problem by coming back later and hugging you... But I would have wanted to.”

Permalink Mark Unread

Nod. "It would have been better that way but - I love you and I am not going to be very good at regretting that you couldn't stay away from me.

Though I wish you hadn't hurt yourself so much? Why did you do that? I can imagine having had sex with you when it was a bad idea because it'd make you happy but if you weren't going to remember it and I didn't want it then I'd instead just do your hair, I think, so you couldn't tell -"

Permalink Mark Unread

"I mean, it would be complicated to say I did not want it. The - first and second times, before the marriage happened, I think I did want it very much and I did not really realize it would be bad for me - I was afraid it would be bad for you but, well, I think I was not doing a very good job of reasoning about it in general. And then afterward... It was very complicated, I think I did know it was hurting me although not how badly, until I had a chance to look back on it. I did not want to lie to you about that?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

"You're a very honest person." Kiss. "Even to your enemies."

Permalink Mark Unread

"I never lied to Vanyel, not directly to his face. Even when I thought he would almost certainly die trying to kill me me. I withheld information, often - I told him I was doing so - I told him it would be very reasonable of him to be concerned that I could be lying. But in fact I did not. When I do bad things I prefer they not come as a surprise to anyone who I am, in fact, trying to work with." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I - really admire what you did with Vanyel. It must have seemed entirely hopeless - almost definitely would have been, had things proceeded with no interworld interruption - and it would have made what was almost-inevitably going to happen hurt so, so much more...and then it turned out to be the most important thing in history, that you'd built the foundations for trust -"

Permalink Mark Unread

"I think it was no longer seeming entirely hopeless by the time I landed in Arda - I had told him of my full plan and he did not instantly convince his kingdom to fight me. It was still unlikely to work, in the end... I am glad of the interworld interruption. It would have been very awful to kill him." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I can imagine." He buries his face in Telumë's hair. "I don't have the slightest doubt you would have done it and it would have been one of the things that was never ever all right, not in a thousand years."

Permalink Mark Unread

Now he's crying again. That keeps happening. Telumë had finally managed to get the rate of crying to something more reasonable, like once every few months. It's - less just-bad though, crying with Maitimo there, and it feels maybe important, like it's one of the things they have to look at together at some point. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Maitimo will shift to a cuddling position that restrains Telumë a little less, and hold him, and sing. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë is getting drowsy at this point, it's late - he's thinking sleepy half-formed thoughts, mostly about how Maitimo is very good and his voice is lovely to listen to, and accidentally thinking most of them publicly since he's been doing so much of that all evening. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Maitimo is kind of tired, too, and can hold him with his eyes closed, pleasantly drowsy, until he falls asleep.

Permalink Mark Unread

Dawn sunlight through a crack between the curtains shines on Telumë's eyelids, and he mumbles something and rolls over and buries his face in Maitimo's chest. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Petpet. Snuggle.

Permalink Mark Unread

He drifts pleasantly without quite falling asleep again. Love you, he sends finally. Ready to get up? 

Permalink Mark Unread

Well, we could. But you are very soft and this bed is very warm, so we could also not.

Permalink Mark Unread

Those things are both true! I am also kind of hungry though. Perhaps being warm will win out until I am hungrier, though.

Permalink Mark Unread

Do you not have servants who bring you breakfast in bed. Servants who bring you breakfast in bed are most of the point of ruling a country, I think. Also the opportunity to improve the lives of hundreds of thousands of people but you know, when you improve the lives of hundreds of thousands of people, some of them end up wanting to be your servant and bring you breakfast in bed.

Permalink Mark Unread

It’s definitely something he could have if he wanted, but Telumë doesn’t really like having other people exist in the space where he sleeps, especially not while he’s actually asleep in it. (Maitimo is obviously an exception.)

Permalink Mark Unread

That's reasonable. Maitimo is used to being in charge of places that are extremely boring and have had one assassin in all of history. Who was Maitimo.

Permalink Mark Unread

It’s not clear that it would be funny at any other time, but Telumë chuckles a little. Apparently being warm and cozy and snuggly is going to defeat hunger for now.

...he could proooobably float some food over to them with magic?

Permalink Mark Unread

Oooooh.

Permalink Mark Unread

It’s going to take him a while, he has to use scrying to find and assemble it, and then very carefully collect the plate in a little mage-barrier and move it over into the bedroom - this would be easier with Fetching but that’s Vanyel’s Gift, not his.

Permalink Mark Unread

“Foundation doesn’t know a way to give people who don’t have them Gifts?”

Permalink Mark Unread

"Not to adults who do not have potential. Foundation can awaken existing potential, and ensure that all babies conceived in this country will have certain potential Gifts. The plan is for the entire next generation to have Mindspeech, and for a much higher prevalence of mage-gift and other Gifts, but not everybody yet, since Foundation thinks our society is not ready to accommodate that and it would be disruptive. Also, Foundation currently plans to make it opt-in whether children wish for their other Gifts to awaken." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Ooooooh. That's - that'll be really good, I think.

Is anyone putting an age limit on the suicide fireballs. I guess that's not straightforwardly something a god can do."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Not straightforwardly, no. Foundation can make sure that here at least, children do not end up with active mage-gifts until age twelve or thirteen; in the normal course of things, Gifts awaken earlier as well as more often in places with high levels of magic use, and some children might have Gifts at seven or eight, which is very obviously too young to make responsible use of being able to Final Strike, as well as all of the other things a mage can do. Foundation can talk to anyone who seems at risk of doing it, per Foresight, and of course can arrange for young mages not to be cornered in bad situations where they might wish to, at least here. Spreading any of these changes to other countries is going to take much longer; the other gods of Velgarth understandably wish to see first whether it is a good idea."

He scoops his plate out of the air and offers Maitimo a pastry. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Maitimo will eat a pastry. "I've thought before that people not dying actually seems like it would tend to make things more predictable- Arda is more predictable than Velgarth - and ought to be possible to get them on board with, eventually, despite the transition costs."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Yes. I hope so too." He eats in silence for a bit. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He will hug him while they eat. "I have plans for today and this evening, but I can come back tomorrow for a depressing memory dump, if you're still feeling ready for that."

Permalink Mark Unread

"...Yes, we ought to do that." Hug. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He gives him a hug. He heads out.

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë spends some time alone in the privacy of his house, just thinking, finding his balance again. Seeing Maitimo and spending long chunks of time with him is very good but it definitely tugs him around. 

He spends the rest of that day, and the next morning, on his usual work, mostly not thinking about the memory exchange; dwelling on it more won't make him any readier for it. He waits for the appointed time. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He is also a bit off-balance, which feels odd, because building emotionally intimate relationships with everyone in sight is all he's been doing since he moved here. It is admittedly usually less fraught. He plays with some children and talks with their parents and offers artistic advice and sings songs and regains his balance, eventually. 

 

Goes to see Telumë, the next afternoon.

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë is waiting for him. "How was your day so far?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Good! I might start running a calligraphy class, there are a bunch of people who want to learn it. Tirion used to have underground tunnels mostly because children love playing in underground tunnels, I was talking with Tsiri about whether we can do that here. Mizrah and Adari are expecting another baby. How about yours?"

Permalink Mark Unread

"Good. I taught some magic lessons." It turns out that he likes teaching children quite a bit. "Did some writing. Reviewed a plan for new construction at the edge of the city. The population is still increasing, people are moving here from other countries and we have a very open policy on that." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I should hope so! That's the only real way to tell if you're doing a good job, whether people want to move to your place."

Permalink Mark Unread

"I agree. Valdemar was always rather restrictive on immigration, despite many people wanting to move there, but - we have greater ability to prevent trouble from happening, and so are not as concerned about vetting people who want to move here. Anyway." He takes a slow breath, lets it out. "Are you ready to do this?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Yes."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Should we go in chronological order? That might be the simplest to keep track of, but would involve starting with the interrogations." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"That works."

Permalink Mark Unread

Then Telumë will bring up the first memory of questioning Maitimo. It's pretty clear. He hadn't yet obtained another of Fëanáro's memory-improving artifacts at this point, the later set of memories ought to be a lot sharper because he had by the time Maitimo returned, but the events were memorable and he's been over them a lot, he hasn't forgotten many details even ten years later. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He knew pretty much what to expect and it is pretty much what he expected, which isn't to say it doesn't hurt, watching himself writhe helplessly under so much mind-affecting magic that he couldn't even think clearly about what he wanted, what he could reasonably hope for, whether these were the last moments of his life. At some point he noticed that he couldn't remember what questions had been asked so far, couldn't remember how long this had been happening, and that was terrifying - he remembered hoping that this was Sauron playing a game with him, that he'd be punished spectacularly in a little bit for whatever mistakes he made here but that he wouldn't have lost everything forever -

His face is very still and calm, which accomplishes less than he'd like thanks to the stupid emotion-bond.

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë's own emotions, inevitably tied into the memory, are pretty messy, and also layered over with his later feelings, since he's gone through it in his head so many times. He was so tired at the time, already, and scared, and - wishing none of this was happening - he remembers how hard it was to hide his feelings from Maitimo, to tuck them away from himself even so that he could bring himself to do this at all. Even knowing it was the right thing to do and that he had basically no choice.

He wants to hug Maitimo but he holds off. Are you ready for the next one? It was - me making very dubious choices. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Already? Affectionately. Yes, I'm ready.

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë takes a deep breath and dives into the second memory, the one that definitely shouldn't have happened, where he came back, not to ask more questions (yet), but just to...see Maitimo at all...to try to apologize, somehow...

And then things happened from there. He honestly can't really remember what he was thinking, at the time. Mostly just that he was hurting, so much, and everything felt so impossible and unfair. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He reaches out and hugs him, in the middle. 

 

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë starts crying. I am sorry - I should not have...

Permalink Mark Unread

I would've, if it'd been the other way around, I do not exactly have a leg to stand on here...

Permalink Mark Unread

...Would you have? I am not - I did it because I was - mostly a scared child, at the time, you are less inclined than I was then to do things which are stupid. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Right but I was evil. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Hmm. Telumë finishes going through that memory. 

...the next one is the especially painful memory where they were trying to question Maitimo after he had woken up with his hair loose and knew perfectly well what must have happened. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He would really like to hug Telumë but it seems like maybe it will not help, or will help mostly along dimensions they can fix later while hurting along dimensions they mostly can't. He sits apart from Telumë. Watches. He can read himself easily enough; he's off-balance, he wasn't expecting Telumë to want that, he can't piece together how they stand, it hurts to be so confused and helpless but it's also useful, he can lean into it, he can watch himself try -

 

If Maitimo were interrogating himself he would do more to limit his attentional capacity, not permit him any background strands of thought. This would be terrifying to be subject to but it'd get you a much less frightening adversary. He does not share this thought.

Permalink Mark Unread

After that memory, there are half a dozen additional, mostly shorter, questioning sessions, coming back to clarify something or other, learning more of what Maitimo knew about Sauron's forces and deployments and specific plans. Some of them were spaced days apart, so there'll be blocks that Maitimo doesn't remember and that Telumë can't give him back, due to having been elsewhere desperately trying to focus on making plans. 

And then the conversation that ended in the accidental marriage, but Maitimo remembers that. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I'm up for more but, uh, are you -

Permalink Mark Unread

I can get through all of the remaining memories from your first stay. There aren't that many left and it'll be easier to put this down and find his balance afterward if he's done all of them. 

The next one is the conversation negotiating for Maitimo's return to Arda. Telumë's emotions are pretty strong in the memory, enough to sometimes block out the actual content for a moment; he was miserable and guilty and ashamed of himself, he didn't want to hurt Maitimo any more - he also felt so, so outclassed trying to negotiate anything with a Maitimo who wasn't on his side...

Permalink Mark Unread

Maitimo was so much happier, then, with something he could use, even if he was aware he was planning to use it to destroy almost everything he cared about. 

Happier but not thinking quite clearly - it seemed pretty likely that forcing Telumë to hide this was worth more in terms of blowing up the war effort than going home was. He just desperately didn't want to, so he'd desperately thrown himself at finding another way.

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë remembers noticing that. Being a little confused. 

The last memory, from this period at least, is the one from after he went off and thought, and came back for the final agreement they ended up coming to. Telumë is in tears again, hugging his knees to his chest, by the time he's done sharing it. 

...he's tempted to keep going but probably this is enough for today, he'll have a challenging time calming down from this as it is. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Well, then he's going to hug him. 

"Thank you. I think that did help put some pieces together. Especially - hmm, I had a lot of helplessness about my ability to model you, which is discomfiting, and now I think I see where I got it and I feel better able to predict you and it's good for me."

Permalink Mark Unread

"I think there is something about myself - then, less so now - I did not really understand until later," Telumë said quietly. "Most people do sometimes think less clearly, and make questionable decisions, due to sexual attraction to someone. At least humans, I am less sure for Quendi. Many people learn strategies for coping with this; I think Vanyel has, for example, and so he would know when not to trust himself. And that is something I did not have any habits around? Because for a very long time I had - dealt with it by just not wanting anybody that way. Since then I have tried to learn some more of the habits that normal people would have for this." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I'm not the slightest bit worried you'll do it again, for what that's worth. And I don't - think I learned very much new about you, except that when you are sufficiently lonely and desperate and scared and overwhelmed you'll fall back on wanting people to be happy rather than sad, and not think past that.

 

I think the mistake it actually looks to me like you made was that you prepared yourself for me to try to manipulate you, and I don't do that when I don't have enough resources. I spend almost all of my time and mental energy building social capital. The end goal is I guess that I be able to spend it but one is actually more effective at building it when one has no plans to spend it, so I mostly don't. I was obsessively focused, the whole time, on having enough of myself to offer you that you would want me to keep existing. And that wasn't - that wasn't the direction from which you'd put up defenses."

Permalink Mark Unread

That seems right. The world had turned into something that made so little sense to him, and he was struggling to think ahead more than five minutes - which isn't like him, or more accurately isn't like Leareth, but probably the months spent traveling through the wilderness alone trying not to die, which was more than half of his current lifetime at that point, hadn't helped.

And, no, he hadn't been protecting against the right things. He genuinely hadn't realized how much Maitimo might be afraid Telumë wouldn't think it was worth keeping him alive, even if in hindsight it makes sense. It might have helped if he'd been able to read Maitimo's thoughts himself, but maybe not, Maitimo is surprisingly good at being strategic even with his thoughts and feelings, when he thinks he has to. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Maybe this is a good point to share the thought that he thinks to keep a Maitimo in captivity you should probably dramatically limit his attentional capacity - "though it would have made me very sad, so I'm glad you didn't. 

Anyway I don't think - I'm not going to say the correct amount to beat yourself up about this was zero but I think it was hit a long time ago. You were a scared kid. You had - one mode of interaction with me that felt like we were on the same side. I desperately wanted you to go for it. It mostly only messed me up because of the memory loss, and I think I'm - very close to being in a place, now, where I am not shaped by the fact it did hurt me in any important ways at all. Unlike you, you're still all - contorted around it - gods, I'm sorry, I think I'd given up too thoroughly on anything that might look manipulative to notice that I should be stepping you back for your own sake -"

Permalink Mark Unread

"I think–" He stops. "Vanyel would think that there is no possible world in which it ought to have been on you, my mind-controlled prisoner, to try to hurt me less. I - well, in your position I think I would have endorsed still caring about that? I am not sure." He had thought he was much less contorted around it, now, he's spent so long trying to process it and figure out how to relate to that particular episode of his past, but it's different, harder, now that Maitimo is back in his life... 

"I am glad it helped you to have the memories back," he says, shakily. "I thought it would. I - think I would feel more comfortable, if I share the rest with you before we spend the night together again. Just so - so that I know you know all the ways that I might have hurt you and not even noticed it." 

Permalink Mark Unread

Handwave. "'Ought to have been' is for winning arguments and I'm not trying to win an argument. I was evil, and I had very little context, and I was under a lot of mindcontrol, and I conceived of myself as fighting for my life, and I specifically had a bad model of you in particular because our interactions were the thing I was missing the most context on, and that is certainly enough to explain why I was not paying very much attention to whether I had reason to make you stop, but if I had been paying attention I think I would've noticed it was good for my goals to make you stop, at least sometimes.

Do you want me to go now or do you want to do the rest of the memories now -"

Permalink Mark Unread

He's tempted to just push ahead but also not sure that's the best idea; it'll work better to share the memories if he's not overlaying them with his current disarrayed emotions. He feels almost dizzy with it.

"I would like to finish doing this," he says, "but - can you just hold me for ten or fifteen minutes? If that is long enough to get settled, then I can do the rest today; if I need longer than that, probably it would mean I ought to wait for another time." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I can do that." Hug. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë closes his eyes, slows his breathing, focuses on the comfort of being in Maitimo's arms. He's a little tired but not desperately so. 

I can keep going. The rest are - probably easier, after the first couple. He saw Maitimo twenty-one times, in about six months. It's less that it stopped being hard, at any point, but it did get to be a pretty repetitive flavour of painful. 

Permalink Mark Unread

All right. Whenever you're ready.

Permalink Mark Unread

He starts with the first conversation, where he explained what had happened, asked Maitimo what he wanted, said he would go off and get advice before making a final decision on whether to send him to a desert island or keep him in the north. Agreed to bring him books, and paper for drawing, to keep himself busy. Offered to send Kalira in to talk to him. 

Permalink Mark Unread

- do you feel badly even about that - I guess maybe we should watch first and talk afterwards -

Permalink Mark Unread

He doesn't really think that he made any mistakes in expectation or did things that he would do differently now, from this point onward. This doesn't really prevent him from feeling bad about it. 

He goes to the next memory, the one where he came back and told Maitimo what they had agreed on. Maitimo suggested that Telumë could use a compulsion to have him share his thoughts via osanwë, rather than have someone else reading him. Telumë agreed, and so he remembers perfectly what Maitimo was thinking. And how it troubled him a lot, and he tried to nudge that aside, because he'd already made his decision here, and all that was left to do was manage as well as they could. 

I asked Findekáno for advice on this, he says, when he's shared all of that memory. And - I spoke to him regularly after that, I wanted to check that I was not hurting you in avoidable ways... I maybe ought to tell you about those conversations as well, eventually. Or I suppose you could ask him about it. 

Permalink Mark Unread

We talked about it a little bit. He said he thought you were making a mistake, and said so, but - but that he thought I'd prefer you be allowed to make it - and he was right, I do prefer that - and he didn't think you were ready to give up, and he thought it'd be very bad for you to force you to when you weren't ready.

 

I'm sorry about - it turned out that not wanting you meddling with my head was tied up with a lot of my - desire to steer things at all - I think I could've explained it some way that hurt you less -

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë shakes his head. In some obscure hard-to-explain way, he's not sure he would have wanted it to hurt less, it would have felt - less honest, maybe. Even though he's still paying the price for that hurt now. Someday they'll both be okay again, and there's a lot of future ahead, and that's what matters. 

He can share the rest of the memories. Visiting Maitimo at intervals, looking at his drawings, talking about books he wrote in another life - playing with his hair - having sex, cuddling afterward, singing Maitimo to sleep... He remembers Maitimo trying to have varied interactions, to not bore him, and how he could never succeed at explaining that he didn't care, that was so far from the point. 

The last time, when they were about to try for the first stage of his god, and Maitimo sensed that they'd made a decision, that Telumë was distracted, and he remembers picking up on Maitimo wondering if he would ever see Telumë again. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Maitimo holds him. Doesn't say much. 

 

I want back all the things that we stole from each other, eventually. For right now - can you just trust me that I can take care of myself, that I will take care of myself, that I am here and free and very very capable of doing whatever I'd like to do and declining whatever I wouldn't -

Permalink Mark Unread

Yes. He shivers. I - was so glad and relieved, actually, that - you wanted to leave right away, after, that you did not even want to talk to me. Because it meant that you knew what you wanted, and it was not about me - I was so scared that I would permanently break your ability to do that...

Permalink Mark Unread

I don't think you could have. Not on the path we were on, at least, you easily could have if you'd been trying to.

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë shudders. I am glad. He feels relieved, to be finished handing over the memories, and also exhausted, wrung out, and almost disoriented, like part of him is here in the present but another part is back there

Permalink Mark Unread

Maitimo holds him and sings, because that seems always safe.

Permalink Mark Unread

He relaxes, slowly. He's so glad that Maitimo is alive (whatever the cost was to Telumë, of picking the option where that could happen, whether or not it was a mistake in expectation). He's so grateful that Maitimo is free and capable of doing exactly and only what he wants, and that the thing he wants is to be here, now. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Do you want to talk about it?"

Permalink Mark Unread

“...I think so.” He isn’t sure where to start, though. “I feel as though everything should make more sense now, somehow, and instead I am just more confused.”

Permalink Mark Unread

 

"- well. I abdicated all responsibility for any aspect of our relationship except 'I won't get broken or work to hurt you', because that was the only place where if I was steering we'd even be steering in the same direction. Some people would enjoy this - I would, I think - but not you, especially not tiny traumatized teenage you who was already trying to be responsible for more than you really could. I guess the main things I'm confused about are - why you kept visiting - what you were getting out of it -"

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë starts to answer and then stops, because it's a lot more complicated than 'I wanted to', even though it's true that he wanted to and that he had made a decision to just do the thing he wanted, maybe a mistake, but one Findekáno hadn't wanted to stop him from making...

"I made an agreement with you, right?" he says finally, still not sure that he has the right words, but he thinks he's winding closer to it. "I had - exactly one lever left, to convince you to stop setting things on fire, so that we could - safely keep you alive - and the lever I had was me. I think you would have noticed, if I kept you there and never visited, even if you did not remember the visits. Sometimes I left you with your hair loose just so that you would know, when you woke up... But I am not sure that is really why, even. I think it just felt as though the terms we had agreed to included my visiting? - And you were happy, when I was there. You were not miserable all the rest of the time but - it would have hurt too much at the time, not letting you have some moments of us being happy together..."

He shakes his head. "I was so angry. Not even at Sauron, really, just - at reality. And I suppose it felt like - defiance, the satisfying kind, telling reality that we were going to have some moments together, in spite of everything... Probably that was a stupid motivation. I am not sure. I am still confused about exactly what I was feeling, then." 

Permalink Mark Unread

- nod. "I felt that too. Not so much by then, I think I was steering away from it by that point, but before that - the idea that there was something we could still have even with all the universe stacked against letting us have it -"

Permalink Mark Unread

Nod. "I think - it was probably not worth the cost, at the time, of - trying to have that thing together. I was not thinking clearly about it, because I had put you where my core values were and there had not been enough time to think about it, it was all tangled... I still feel as though - some piece of that was good, even if it would have been better not to try." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Not worth the cost to you?"

Permalink Mark Unread

"I am not actually sure! It is - hard to weigh that. It feels not worth the cost to you of - well, I think if I had not made that mistake, I could have returned you to Arda under conditions that would not have let you burn so much trust with your people - where the Valar would not have exiled you..." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"That would have - meant a lot to me. I guess I wish it'd gone like that. But - not uncomplicatedly. And ...I understand why you were trying, and what you were trying, and nothing that happened makes me love you less. Or want you less."

Permalink Mark Unread

Hearing the words seems to loosen something in his chest - he hadn't realized he was hurting until he wasn't anymore... I love you. I want you so much– we did not talk about doing things tonight, did we. Figuring out where a reasonable place would be to draw the line feels impossible, right now, he wants to just tell Maitimo that he trusts him and Maitimo should do whatever he wants but he's not sure that's right either... 

Permalink Mark Unread

We did not. So I guess we cannot do anything. And he leans in to kiss him and stops just short of his lips, as if there were a magic barrier to actually touching, and then draws back and lifts his hand to brush across Telumë's cheek so that Telumë can feel only the slightest ghost of a touch.

Permalink Mark Unread

Okay, that's both weirdly touching and really irritating. Telumë tries to glare at him but bursts out laughing instead. 

Tomorrow, he decides. I mean, if you are available and interested, of course. And - I would not mind if you held me and sang a little longer, now, but only if you want to. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Tomorrow what.

Permalink Mark Unread

Tomorrow we can talk about doing more things than playing with each other's hair. And then do them. If you want. He's still not sure if he's going to want to set a different limit for himself; it'll depend how he feels in the morning. 

Permalink Mark Unread

That sounds lovely. Another ghost kiss. I will hold you and sing to you, I think.

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë smiles, and closes his eyes, and relaxes completely.

I might test that tea Foundation knew about that supposedly might make my hair more sensitive, he says finally. By myself, just to check that it does not have any horrible side effects. 

Permalink Mark Unread

But what if it has side effects that make it unpleasant to be all by one's self.

Permalink Mark Unread

I am sure I can manage. At worst he can just sing himself to sleep. 

Permalink Mark Unread

All right. And he sings to him and holds him and occasionally runs a finger along Telumë's jaw, not quite touching him.

Permalink Mark Unread

He stays there until the sun is low in the sky. 

"All right, I think I want to be alone now," he says finally, with some reluctance. "I love you." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I love you. See you tomorrow."

Permalink Mark Unread

"See you tomorrow!" 

And he sits down in his living room and has a small amount of the tea, and tells Foundation to intervene if he tries to go find Maitimo or ask him to come over or something. 

...The tea, it turns out, does have some side effects that make being alone, and specifically being somewhere Maitimo isn't, kind of unpleasant. He feels very warm and relaxed and happy and he wants to cuddle and he can't, if he even tries a literal god is going to stop him. So instead he'll wander around looking at his tapestries, which are extra beautiful right now - watching the sunset through his window, it's the best sunset - going around and touching all of the soft things in his house - and eventually flopping in his bed, hugging his pillow, and talking to Foundation for at least an hour, mostly about how he loves everyone in the multiverse. (If Foundation thinks this is a weird conversation, they don't say anything about it.)

The next morning he wakes up very slightly fuzzy-headed, but getting up and having some food helps. He sits and thinks for a while.

Maitimo? 

Permalink Mark Unread

Yes?

Permalink Mark Unread

When are you free today? I miss you. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I will take a look at my schedule. 

 

Huh, it looks like I was going to fight evil and end death and make sure all children everywhere have happy childhoods, but someone has already done that, leaving me at loose ends.

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë giggles. Well, would you like to accompany me on a walk? I wish to see how the public flower-garden is coming along. They have an area with its own little weather-barriers, so plants from various other climates can be grown. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Sure. 

 

He will meet him there.

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë reaches for his hand. I missed you very much last night, but I was good and did not break the rule I had set and ask you to come over. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Oh good. I would not have come over, because we are doing all of our flirtation by very strict ethics these days and my model of Vanyel would shake his head disapprovingly.

Permalink Mark Unread

Also I told Foundation to intervene if I tried that, so there were three levels of precaution against me doing something I would later feel unsure about. Anyway. I tried the tea and it was - actually rather nice - and would be much nicer with you there, I think. However, I do not think I can make any decisions once I have had some, so I had better make all of them beforehand. 

Permalink Mark Unread

My model of Vanyel is making a bit of a face but not yet shaking his head disapprovingly. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I think if I have some today we should not have sex. I would want to be - fully in my right mind, for that. He doesn't really feel ready for that anyway. Honestly if you just petted my hair and kissed me and cuddled me for several hours, I think I would be utterly delighted with that. I am not sure if that sounds fun to you though? 

Permalink Mark Unread

Will you be cuddly and affectionate and helpless and dubiously in control of yourself?

Permalink Mark Unread

Probably! 

Permalink Mark Unread

That sounds fun to me.

Permalink Mark Unread

Then maybe we could do that later today! I want to walk through more of the city together first, I think. I like people seeing us together. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Me too! I read their minds sometimes if I don't think they’d be furious with me about it. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I think this is one place in the world where a surprising number of people would not mind at all. And they can walk through his - their - city, for a while, arm in arm. Stop for lunch at a new restaurant, wander onward, look at the new tower in the East section, it’s impressively tall as human construction goes.

Permalink Mark Unread

It is a good city. He’s not sure whether his demand that Telumë build him a country actually had anything to do with it but he’s delighted with how it turned out.

Permalink Mark Unread

He’s very proud of it! 

By late afternoon Telumë’s feet are kind of sore, and he’s content to wind their way back to his house, greeting everyone they pass.

Permalink Mark Unread

(Maitimo is so delighted by the personality Telumë turns out to have in peacetime.)

Permalink Mark Unread

Well, it’s the correct shape to be here, right? And more fundamentally than any of his specific traits, Leareth - Ma’ar at the beginning - was someone who tried to become the best shape he could be, to achieve his goals.

He lets them into his house. Stops in front of one of his tapestries. “This looked so beautiful last night.” He still feels like he can see it in a way he never did before.

Permalink Mark Unread

"I'm getting kind of curious about this drug."

Permalink Mark Unread

“It is very odd!” Telumë heads to the kitchen and looks for where he put the rest of the herbs for it. “Are you hungry?”

Permalink Mark Unread

"I could have dinner."

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë isn’t a particularly creative about food, when he’s just feeding himself, but he has one of the magical refrigeration boxes, and right now it contains some savory pastries and a container of soup which he can reheat with magic.

They can sit at his dining table and eat, while the sun turns slanting and golden through the window; one of Telumë‘s strongest architectural preferences for his house was that there be plenty of big windows, and his room has a skylight too.

The drug kicks in halfway through. He can tell because he’s suddenly captivated by a sunbeam, staring at it, awed by how much beauty can fit in something so ordinary.

Permalink Mark Unread

"- you all right?"

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë turns to look at him- oh, his husband is so pretty, he could stare at him forever. 

Yes, he says happily. Love you. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Awww. Love you too.

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë makes a halfhearted effort to eat more; it tastes better than usual but he’s also distracted by everything. Mostly by Maitimo. Finally, he gives up and sort of flops against him. 

You are very good, he says cheerfully - probably he means something more detailed than that but words are sort of hard.

Permalink Mark Unread

Snuggle snuggle. I am very evil! Less evil than I used to be but still, far more evil than average.

Permalink Mark Unread

He laughs. For some reason it seems very very funny. Well, I am also more evil than average. I murdered all those people. 

Permalink Mark Unread

If you bring them back it doesn't count! It's just kind of like punching them. Punching them fifteen years into the future.

Permalink Mark Unread

The mental image that gives him is even funnier. Telumë giggles and kisses Maitimo. Takes his hand, pausing to stare at it for a moment and wonder how he's never even noticed how beautiful Maitimo's hands are.

...This drug is very strange, he thinks briefly before losing track of it again. It's pretty lovely right now. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Maitimo will kiss him back! And snuggle him! And sing a silly song about how love is like Treelight sparkling on the surface of a river.

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë is so happy and so thoroughly distracted, the song is so pretty, lines from it keep setting off little whorls of thought that don't go far because Maitimo is filling most of his attention, Maitimo is so shiny and bright and the most important thing in the universe - eventually he thinks, sort of plaintively, that the snuggling is very nice but they're still at his table and could probably be snuggling more if they went elsewhere. 

Permalink Mark Unread

They could! They could go to Telumë's bed and then Telumë could be much more thoroughly snuggled.

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë would like that!

(He drags together his thoughts, briefly and with great effort, to wonder if he took a stronger dose of the drug by accident or if he's just more affected because Maitimo is here, he thinks that he could string words together better yesterday, but it's not like it really matters, Maitimo's here and so he's safe and everything is fine and he can be helpless for a little while.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Maitimo is going to kiss him! And sing to him! And pet his hair!

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë isn't sure if this is approaching what it's like for Quendi to have their hair petted, but it's pleasant and distracting enough that he's basically incapable of thoughts, for quite a long time. 

- at some point it occurs to him that Maitimo has hair too, which he knows is very soft, and he wants to touch all of the soft things right now, so he squirms over enough to reach for Maitimo's braid - pauses for a moment in case Maitimo doesn't want that...

Permalink Mark Unread

How sweet of him! Maitimo wants that (and has faster reflexes than impaired Telumë anyway.)


Maitimo is going to try to be slightly less distracted because probably one of them should retain some common sense. However he is only going to aim for 'slightly' and he will still be very thoroughly distracted if Telumë wants to pet his soft soft hair a while.

(Maitimo is sending want and love and more).

Permalink Mark Unread

It is so soft, it has to be the softest thing in the world, and Maitimo being distracted is the most adorable thing in the world, and he's so burstingly, overflowingly happy, it seems very unfair that Maitimo can't feel that directly as well, but he does his best to convey it by making that thought public, and by kissing Maitimo and running his hands through his softsoftsoft hair some more. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I know how soft Quendi hair is," he assures Telumë, and kisses him, and gasps and wiggles when hairtouched.

Permalink Mark Unread

Then Telumë will keep petting his hair until he runs out of attention span for doing a single action repeatedly, even a very nice one, and he flops over and just smiles at Maitimo, a bit vaguely. Love you. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I know. I love you too.

Permalink Mark Unread

He has to pull his thoughts together, effortfully, before he can manage more words. Are you having fun? I wanted you to have a good time.

Permalink Mark Unread

Patpat. I am having a lovely time. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Good! Snuggle. Happy wiggle. Though something is sort of distracting him... I am hungry, he complains once he's managed to figure it out. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Well I can get you food but would have to stop snuggling you to do it.

Permalink Mark Unread

He thinks about it. If you stop snuggling me for two minutes I could manage, he decides. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Then he will dart to the kitchen and try to get food in two minutes.

Permalink Mark Unread

There's fruit on the counter, and some sweet pastries in a box on one of the shelves. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He will bring Telumë back some fruit and a sweet pastry.

Permalink Mark Unread

Thank you. It's sort of a ridiculous amount of delicious, but he still keeps getting distracted looking at Maitimo, so it takes him a while. He flops down again. Snuggles now? 

Permalink Mark Unread

Sure, snuggles. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë cuddles up against him - kisses him - finds himself wanting to do more than kiss, but hesitates because he has some vague recollection that he isn't supposed to. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Imaginary Vanyel is scowling disapprovingly. We have to make him go away before I can take your clothes off.

Permalink Mark Unread

Oh. Telumë is finding that hard to parse, but the mental image of Vanyel scowling at them is very funny and he starts laughing again. Would he normally find it that funny? He spends a moment trying to orient on that. ...I am sorry, I think I am rather giddy right now. It's wearing off a tiny bit, maybe, enough that he's slightly self-conscious about having spent several hours not making any sense.  

Permalink Mark Unread

You are. It's good, I'm glad you're happy. A more sensible and less silly explanation would be that you are trying to teach yourself that you will not have sex when you didn't mean to, and you didn't mean to, this time, so we shouldn't. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Right, I remember. He is maybe slightly annoyed with his past self about that plan, but he can still follow it. And just be cuddly and happy and cozy and kind of sleepy, he's finding it annoying to keep his eyes open so he stops. He still knows Maitimo is right there being very pretty. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Maitimo tries to imagine the Leareth he first met being intoxicated and half out of his mind and thoroughly content and happy and sleepy about it. He cannot imagine it at all. He pets Telumë and sings, quietly, in case Telumë is about to fall asleep which it seems like he might be.

Permalink Mark Unread

He's halfheartedly trying to stay awake, so he can keep enjoying how nice everything is right now, but he's so sleeeepy and it doesn't take that many minutes before this turns into being asleep. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Awwwww.

 

And he'll stretch out his attention across the city but stay here in case he's disoriented when he wakes. 

(He has absolutely zero desire to try the tea. Being out of control around Telumë feels awful to even contemplate, will maybe feel awful forever. That's okay.)

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë sleeps late. Wakes up feeling tired and fuzzy-headed - his memories of the night before are a bit foggy and jumbled, he doesn't like that, he's not sure if it was less noticeable on the test night because he only did very boring things.

He turns. Maitimo? 

Permalink Mark Unread

Hey. Headscritch. How are you feeling?

Permalink Mark Unread

Ugh. Kind of out of it. He stretches. I am not sure I remember everything from last night properly...? He doesn't think that he did anything he would regret now, but it's disconcerting that he's not entirely sure. 

Permalink Mark Unread

You declared that everything was very pretty and that my hair was very soft. We cuddled. I wouldn't - he doesn't mean to sound defensive but it's there, a bit -

Permalink Mark Unread

I know you would not actually let me do anything I would later be uncomfortable with. I, just - I would be a little embarrassed if you said I had tried to push you on it repeatedly or something. He trusts Maitimo, at least here and now, that's not the part that's in question. 

Permalink Mark Unread

No. Hug. Honestly you were too distractible to be insistent about anything but also you remembered you shouldn't.

Permalink Mark Unread

Good. He relaxes. Then I think I liked last night. I would not want to do that very often, I think, it is a bit uncomfortable being that impaired. Not at the time, he'd been perfectly content with it at the time, but now. But I am glad we did it and - I think maybe it helped, for me? I am not sure with what. It feels obscurely like there's some weight he's been carrying, and finally realized he could set down. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I'm really glad. It's - really good that you feel safe enough you can do it. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I think so too. I think - if I can mostly trust myself not to do stupid things when I am that level of absurdly impaired, I do not actually need to worry very much about the times when I am not intoxicated. He pauses, thoughtful. I think it is probably much easier to make wise decisions when one has not recently inherited one's brain from a teenager. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Seems pretty likely. And when under less extraordinary stress, and when no one is trying to get you to make bad ones.

Permalink Mark Unread

Nod. Then I think I am more comfortable with - not worrying very much that I will accidentally do something that hurts you. And - even if I do I trust you to stop me, and leave if you have to. That feels very, very good to him, actually, another weight he can set down. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Yes. I don't think you need to worry about that at all.

Permalink Mark Unread

Then he can finally stop being scared. Or try, anyway, it's a deeply-engrained habit and it might take longer to break fully.

I love you. I am so glad to be married to you, and that you are here now and we can be together, and - we have so much future...

Permalink Mark Unread

We do. Forever and ever ... until we find something even bigger and even worse out there.

Permalink Mark Unread

Sigh. There are not going to stop being problems. Not for a very, very long time, if ever. But - this, where we are now, is better than I could have imagined twenty years ago. Even taking into account the part where you spent a while trying to murder me. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I was thinking about that, last night, trying to imagine the Leareth I first met ever letting his guard down that much -

Permalink Mark Unread

I absolutely would not have! I think even now, I would not do it with anyone except you. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I am glad that you trust me. It feels unearned - or, I feel very distant from the person who earned it - but you are not wrong to. 

Permalink Mark Unread

It's not the same trust, Telumë thinks. It's - causally related, of course, there's a reason he tried so hard to find a way of trusting this Maitimo, he wouldn't have for a stranger. But it still feels to him like a new thing that they've built - are still building - he's not sure how to point at it better than that. 

Permalink Mark Unread

- nod. He's - mad, sort of, that the old thing was lost, it was a good thing, but - but it's nice to have something he is building as the person he is now. 

 

And he wants to kiss Telumë but they haven't negotiated anything about today at all. Ethics are terrible.

Permalink Mark Unread

He’s still pretty upset about everything they lost - all of it was good - but, well, he’s also a pretty different person, it would need to be different anyway.

I think I need some time alone after this to think, he says. He's happy but also feels kind of off-balance. Are you free tonight, though? Or tomorrow, if that is preferable. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I am free tonight. And tomorrow.

Permalink Mark Unread

Then I think tonight, but can I confirm with you later this afternoon? 

Permalink Mark Unread

Of course. And he hugs him and heads out.

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë putters around his house for the rest of the morning, takes a quick nap, and once his head is less fuzzy, wanders out into the city. Remembers dozens of times, when this house or garden or statue was built, years ago, how he would think about someday showing it to Maitimo.

He has a broader foundation now than he did at the beginning; it's not just held together on Maitimo. But he is sort of still, metaphorically, a house that was originally built around loving Maitimo, so all their interactions poke him pretty deeply. He needs to walk around and metaphorically touch all of the other things that a Telumë is built on, find his balance again. 

He feels a lot steadier by midafternoon, and is starting to miss Maitimo. He reaches out with osanwë. So, tonight? 

Permalink Mark Unread

If so I think you had better announce what's on the menu right now.

Permalink Mark Unread

I have been considering whether it even makes sense to keep doing the strict precommitments here, Telumë admits. I think perhaps it does not? It was very helpful for - helping me calibrate on whether and how much I can trust myself, but I feel fairly calibrated on this now? And I trust you. And thinking about the limits beforehand when I am not sure what mood I will end up being is difficult and takes a lot of attention. 

Permalink Mark Unread

That works too. Whatever is good for you, really, so long as - you feel sure you chose it.

Permalink Mark Unread

I have spent most of today thinking about it, and I am quite sure from my side. I wanted to make sure it would not make anything feel more difficult for you, changing it at this point. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I don't think it was a loadbearing part of how I was thinking about anything. You caught more trauma than me on the 'I might have sex when it's a bad idea' front. 


I don't think we're ready. But I'm okay with not having rules about it.

Permalink Mark Unread

I agree, I am not feeling very ready, just - I think at this point the difficulty is less that I distrust my desires here. It is more that I am struggling to even notice whether I want it or not, when I am not actually with you? I know very strongly that I wish to - see you, talk to you, look at new construction with you, have you hold me and sing to me - all of that feels wonderful and good whenever I think about it, whereas sex only intermittently does. I am very confused about it. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Are you sure this body is attracted to men? It occurred to me at some point that most aren't.

Permalink Mark Unread

I think that is probably not the main issue, given how absurdly turned on I was by everything you did when - all of that happened - including when the thing you did was 'try to kill me, but cleverly'. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Okay, fair point. Maybe the problem now is that I am not trying to kill you.

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë is still on his balcony drinking (non-drugged) tea, and he almost spits out a mouthful of it. You were not trying to kill me before the attack on Haven, he points out. You tried to kill me zero times, in fact. I think - probably I just need more time? I have a great many habits built around it not feeling safe to want you in that way. That is less true about wanting to see you or cuddle you, I think, so those are not as complicated. Anyway. Do you want to come over, or go somewhere else first?

Permalink Mark Unread

Let's go out walking. Watch some birds.

Permalink Mark Unread

Of course. He smiles, gets up and heads for the door. Have you heard from Kalira lately? 

Permalink Mark Unread

We exchange letters! She seems really happy. I suspect she'll be a spectacular bird researcher.

Permalink Mark Unread

I am sure she will! From what I recall of talking to her, she is quite brilliant. 

And they can wander around some of the public gardens again, looking for birds. There are a pretty wide variety of birds in the city, most of them non-native to the region; the climate inside the city is very different from that outside, after all. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Maitimo is secondhand an expert on birds and can tell Telumë all about them. And hold his hand.

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë squeezes his hand. Leans on his shoulder when they stop to look at things. Eventually he's hungry enough to suggest they stop at a different new restaurant near the water, which has a pleasant outdoor courtyard surrounded by flowerbeds. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë's beautiful city is going to be so well set up for interworld trade once more of the Noldor are back and there's more of that. (He has a lot of ideas about how to make it go well.)

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë talks about some magic research he's been doing, and some plans for future developments in their country that he's been discussing with Foundation, and is eager to hear Maitimo's thoughts on all of it. 

Permalink Mark Unread

On the whole he prefers lucid Telumë by a lot, even if there was something fascinating about Telumë a little bit out of his mind.

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë also prefers being lucid, which is unsurprising to him overall. He really likes talking to Maitimo about plans and ideas, even if it was surprisingly nice to set down that part of himself for a while and be totally in the moment. And it's nice how some of that relaxed comfortable feeling still lingers now. He endorses feeling that way with Maitimo, but it was hard to find his way to it before.

When they're done eating they can head back to Telumë's house, if Maitimo wants. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Maitimo does want that. 

Permalink Mark Unread

As soon as they're inside the door, Telumë stops. I want to kiss you. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ooooooh. Kiss.

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë leans up against the closed door and kisses Maitimo and tries to pay very close attention to everything he's feeling and everything he wants. He wants to run his hand along Maitimo's back, so he does.

...He wants Maitimo to pick him up and carry him somewhere. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Maitimo can scoop him up and carry him around on a tour of his house. Did you want me to carry you to your parlor so you could straighten pillows? Did you want me to carry you to your garden so you could water your flowers? Did you want me to carry you to your kitchen so you can sweep it?  ...did you want me to carry you to your bedroom -

Permalink Mark Unread

He laughs. Bedroom, please. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He knows the joke he'd make, if everything were all right - your wish is my command, he would say very seriously, all of his body language changed to devotion to this sacred duty - but everything is not quite all right so he just kisses him and takes him to his bedroom.

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë is having some trouble introspecting what he wants, right now, maybe he's thinking about it too hard or something. Does Maitimo have any advice? 

Permalink Mark Unread

Well, if Maitimo takes his own shirt off and lies down next to Telumë and kisses his forehead and pets his hair, is that good or bad. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He thinks it's good! In a kind of confusing way, but from his notes on his previous life and the start of his relationship with Maitimo as Leareth, it was confusing then as well. (It's not even that it wasn't confusing before when he was a very young Telumë, even, it's more that he was ramming past his uncertainty because the loneliness and desperation were louder.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

I am glad this isn't that. Confusing is - okay, right, we're not going anywhere, we can just - do things while they're nice. 

He thinks it would be nice to take off Telumë's shirt, though.

Permalink Mark Unread

Probably that would be nice? Telumë suspects that Maitimo might actually have a better model than he does of what he'll enjoy, here, since apparently he has a decade worth of various mental barriers in the way of even noticing it. He's definitely willing to try and see if Maitimo taking his shirt off is, in fact, nice. 

Permalink Mark Unread

In that case he will for the sake of information-gathering take off Telumë's shirt. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ooh, he likes that. And now he definitely is wanting to kiss Maitimo some more. 

Permalink Mark Unread

And in that fashion they can work things out, maybe, slowly and carefully and gently with Maitimo stopping short of anything that feels like it might still be a stretch.

Permalink Mark Unread

It feels sort of odd that it's still happening that way, with Maitimo being the one who's very patient and gentle, his fragmentary notes on their very early relationship mention that as well. But it's very good, and Maitimo is very good, and he's so glad that they're together now. 

Permalink Mark Unread

And a few weeks later they get a letter from Vanyel. (There's a very fast and efficient mail system between the countries now.) He asks if they would be interested in visiting Haven. Some people are back. Queen Karis in particular, and she wants to thank Telumë in person for his work that led up to Foundation existing and helping bring her and her daughter back. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Oh good, that's got to be good for Van."

Permalink Mark Unread

"I think so! He sounds very happy in the letter. Anyway, would you like to accompany me on a state visit to Haven? It has been several years, I ought to go again anyway." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Yes, I would!!"

- embarrassedsadstressed nostopthat excited cheerful.

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë reaches for his hand. Hey. I know you do not prefer to tell me all of your feelings without meaning to, but - if this is going to be stressful, I would like if we could speak of it. It seems important to be able to talk about. 

Permalink Mark Unread

It's just - 

 

- they all know, and I don't like people knowing. And they don't just know in the abstract from having figured out how the dates line up, Jisa watched, Melody helped, Dara was called in to cast a Truth Spell on him in his bed after the marriage - 

- also I'm going to need to apologize about the attempted murder - 

Permalink Mark Unread

That makes sense. I am sorry. I think - it will help, probably, with making that less salient in their story of our marriage, if they see you and interact with you as you are now. It was a long time ago, as humans reckon it, and - many other things happened, afterward. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Nod.

Permalink Mark Unread

Then they can prepare for the journey. There are permanent Gates everywhere now; they can't get all the way to Haven in a single leap, the network is segregated into lots of little sections like they'd discussed once in Arda, but they can get there in half a dozen hops with barely any travel actually on foot.

Permalink Mark Unread

And he is, despite some complicated feelings, excited! It is good to see Valdemar starting to rebuild.

Permalink Mark Unread

Vanyel comes out to meet them at the Gate-terminus, without Stef. He looks visibly older (he's fifty now), but overall quite healthy and spry, and he's smiling very brightly. "It's so good to see both of you! Thank you for coming!" 

Permalink Mark Unread

"It's good to see you too! Oh, this is lovely, there's so much city back for people to come back to -" and a little bit scoldingly - "Did you do far too much of it yourself -"

Permalink Mark Unread

"...Maybe a little. We're still shorter on mages than is ideal. I promise I've been outsourcing, though! A lot of it was built without magic entirely."  

Permalink Mark Unread

"You'll have to show us around."

Permalink Mark Unread

Vanyel will happily do that!

The style is a lot closer to Haven of old, with low-contoured stone buildings forming the core of the Palace, but everything is very clean and extremely well-made with some tasteful carvings as extra decoration, and there are statues. Vanyel steers a wide berth around one that appears to be of him. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He will ask questions about the architectural features that are not enormous statues of Vanyel.

Permalink Mark Unread

Well, that one is an enormous statue of Telumë instead! (He does not look fifteen, though, the sculptor has made him look at least twenty.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

A good choice! Maitimo thinks that puberty improved his husband significantly. He ruffles his hair and says as much.

Permalink Mark Unread

Awwww. Vanyel smiles at them, and then keeps explaining all the various monuments and statues around the place. There's one of Savil too. He gets a bit choked when he describes that one. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Someday, maybe, there'll be a way to get back the people who died before Mandos was helping. But that day might be very far away. He pays attention to the descriptions. He admires the city. He asks after Stef, and Treven and Jisa, and Karis and Arven.

Permalink Mark Unread

Stef is well. He's enjoyed all the songs he got to write about the war and is now moving on to songs about Foundation and new developments in Valdemar, he's probably going to write a whole song cycle about the people coming back now. 

Treven and Jisa, believe it or not, have two children now, both little girls, and Jisa is pregnant with her third! She's hoping for a boy this time. 

Karis and Arven only just got here, from Karse, so they should swing by and ask them directly! 

Permalink Mark Unread

They should!!

 

The children give Maitimo lots of feelings. Love and happy and - a bit impatient and wistful -

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë glances at him, reaches out and squeezes his hand. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Once they're done the basic tour, Vanyel leads the back around. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Queen Karis is sitting on a bench surrounded by flower gardens, while a small child with abundant jet-black hair pulled back into pigtails plays in a sandbox. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"It is good to see you both well."

Permalink Mark Unread

She stands up, beaming at him. "We are so grateful to be back! I am very pleased to see you again. And Telumë - thank you, so much, for all of your work - words cannot express it..." She ducks her head. "Arven? Will you come here and say hello?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë has gotten a lot more practice at interacting with kids in the last decade. He crouches down so his eyes are level with Arven's, asks her some questions about how she likes Haven and whether she has new friends here, then accepts an offer to join her at playing in the sandbox for a few minutes. 

I hope you are not too bored, he tells Maitimo ruefully. Small things like this are so memorable for children, I think. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Bored? Never. Just - missing home. And - and looking forward to seeing you with ours, someday.

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë looks up, surprised, but smiling. Someday. 

Permalink Mark Unread

And they can do a circuit of other people they should meet, including Treven probably, and maybe Dara and Jisa and Stef and Melody none of whom he's looking forward to seeing but several of whom might be awkward to conspicuously not.

Permalink Mark Unread

Treven and Dara will have lunch with him as a sort of informal politics type meeting. They're friendly and warm and do not mention anything about the events of a decade ago, or give any hint that it's on their mind at all. Mostly Treven has lots of questions for Telumë about his country; for many of them, Maitimo knows the answers, and Telumë sometimes looks over to indicate that he can explain it better. 

Permalink Mark Unread

This is fine and not too horrible.

Permalink Mark Unread

Jisa doesn't seek him out, after, but Stef does, wandering up casually while he and Telumë are in one of the gardens. "Hey. Lovely afternoon out." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Isn't it? You have weather, here, our dome is lovely but it makes it a bit same-y. How have you been."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Doing well! Making sure Van takes care of himself. Trying to assuage his vanity about getting old, he hates that. Writing lots of songs. You?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Won't Lórien fix that for him? He was at one point vaguely amenable to curing aging for humans on some kind of idiosyncratic individual basis which I would expect to at least include Vanyel."

Permalink Mark Unread

"We haven't been back to Valinor. Not being able to Gate in and out is frustrating. I reckon we'll go at some point, but it's not like he has any health problems from it, he's just being self-conscious." 

And Stef osanwës him privately as well. If you're worried I'm still mad about the dam, I'm not really. It was a long time ago and you did it for understandable reasons which no longer apply. I showed great restraint and avoided writing any songs about our heroic escape, even. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Well, I wouldn't particularly have counted 'I was mostly trying to kill you in order to condemn the whole universe to eternal torment' as a mitigating consideration but - I appreciate it. And apologize for trying to kill you.

Permalink Mark Unread

Apology accepted. Er, I did want to say that Jisa's not mad at all and hasn't been for a long time, but she's - probably going to avoid you unless you demonstrate that you're fine with her company. She feels very bad about the events surrounding the interrogations. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He gestures at his husband across the room. I forgave Telumë.

Permalink Mark Unread

Fair enough, I didn't say it was reasonable of her to feel that way. You and Telumë are getting along all right nowadays, then? 

Permalink Mark Unread

He's not very hard to get along with, these days. He's best friends with everybody in his city. He sounds very proud. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Awww, that's lovely. Stef shoots a speculative look in Telumë's direction. He's seemed - different from Leareth - on the few occasions we've spoken, but it's not like I knew Leareth very well. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I think he's really really different from Leareth. Part of that is probably that he - lost something - it'll be really interesting once my father figures out that artifact he speculated about that gives him all his memories of all his lives - but I think by now at least half of it is that he gained something. He doesn't have to be ruthless and paranoid and distant to accomplish his goals anymore.

Permalink Mark Unread

Right, it's kind of a whole different world, isn't it? Van's changed too. I do think he'd have most of the missing information by now, in terms of things he forgot, he has records. Van said he's spent a bunch of time reviewing them and it's easier because he has that perfect-memory artifact for it. Although I guess that still loses something, compared to having lived it. 

Permalink Mark Unread

It's - a lot more like Valinor. No real problems you have to be a hero about, just lots you have to keep a smile on your face for.

I have no idea how long it'll take my father but I think it'll still - add something. Especially from the early lives he doesn't have much from.

Permalink Mark Unread

That makes sense. Anyway, I wish both of you all the best, truly. And Stef goes back to talking out loud, about the weather and the gardens and teasing Telumë with a song-snippet he's improvising on the spot, this one not about war-heroics but rather about kissing babies and dedicating new buildings and all the activities of a well-liked peacetime leader. 

Permalink Mark Unread

 

 

He decides to solve the puzzle of whether to bother Jisa by waiting for Telumë to meet her kids, and then sending her the inevitable adorable image of them playing together. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Jisa is momentarily caught off guard by this and unsure how to respond! It's not that hard to come up with conversation where her children are involved, though. :Aren't they lovely? They've been so excited for you and Telumë to visit, they were pestering me incessantly these last few days: 

Permalink Mark Unread

What, really? Our reputation for sitting on the ground making illusions has spread this far? That is good news, that suggests by my calculations that by next year we'll be clamored-for in Jkatha. 

 

 

Stef said you were worried I'd be angry. I'm not. We were all doing our best. Relatedly, I apologize for doing my best to murder you.

Permalink Mark Unread

Jisa giggles. (And is irritated with herself, she's tried so hard to break the nervous-giggle habit). :Stef was so impressed with that murder attempt, you know. And mad, but he said it was very masterful. Anyway: 

Permalink Mark Unread

He made it very difficult for me. And if he'd been better at that Maitimo wouldn't be exiled from his whole world but - that's not anyone's fault. 

How are you and Treven?

Permalink Mark Unread

:Really well! He's a good King. It's too bad that Randi won't be coming back anytime soon, but - Treven's doing fine. Everyone likes him. He's very likeable as a person. And we're rebuilding and all the dead people are coming back. This is going to be a good year: 

Permalink Mark Unread

I think so too.

Permalink Mark Unread

:Well, what's your favourite thing about the new city up north? Does it have a permanent name yet, people were calling it 'Telumë's city' but he hates that so it's mostly just 'the city', which is fine as long as there's only one big city but there'll be more eventually: 

Permalink Mark Unread

This is what you need three quarreling linguistics guilds for, they'd never let a city slide into being called 'City' or something. I like the icebergs, they're so pretty to watch from a cozy balcony within the dome.

Permalink Mark Unread

:Oh, yes, that's gorgeous. There's that one restaurant up in the tower with the entire wall that's just a big window...: Jisa can gossip for a few paragraphs more about the city. :Not sure how long you're staying: she adds, :but you should join us for supper if you have time. We could invite Karis as well, have all the children there...: 

Permalink Mark Unread

I am sure we have time for that.

Permalink Mark Unread

:Amazing!: 

Permalink Mark Unread

So they can have dinner with Treven and Jisa and Vanyel and Stef and Karis and the children a few nights later. The conversation inevitably ends up mostly about kids. They stay in Haven for around another week, so that everyone who's just come back from the dead and wants to meet Telumë can do so. 

(Telumë has pretty mixed feelings about this! Most of the people are grateful and want to thank him, and he still feels like he instead owes them an apology for murdering them in the first place, but he goes with it.)

It's a nice visit and he's glad they went, but he's also relieved when it's time to head back north. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I think thanking you is a - better narrative for them. The world now being run by the conquerors who killed your family is terrifying, the world now being run by the heroes who avenged and then retroactively saved them is reassuring. 

 

Hug. 

It'd bother me too, though.

Permalink Mark Unread

Hug. I know. It makes sense, just - I do not have to like what was necessary, to reach the point where we are now. I had such hopes it could go differently... But at least they are back, and with almost all of themselves and their memories, that is something. 

And they can settle back into their routine in the still-nameless city. 

Permalink Mark Unread

And one day a few weeks later Telumë gets a burst of complicated emotions - there's happiness and stress and avoidance and resentment and grief -

Permalink Mark Unread

He's in the middle of a city council meeting but this seems worth interrupting it for. Maitimo? Is something wrong? 

Permalink Mark Unread

Huh? No, good - letter from my mother, she and my father are back.

Permalink Mark Unread

Oh. That fits. I am very glad to hear that. ...Do you wish to talk about it? I can wrap up this meeting in half an hour. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Maybe this evening, but don't rush through your work on my account.

Permalink Mark Unread

All right. And he doesn't rush, though he does reschedule a few non-urgent plans he had, where rescheduling won't inconvenience anyone else. He lets Maitimo know when he's done everything for the day and headed home. 

Permalink Mark Unread

And Maitimo comes over to hug him. 

I should invite them over and apologize, he says. It won't be very difficult, I know what my father needs to hear, and then he'll forgive me and everything will be fine. (Frustration, resentment.)

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë hugs him back. Speaking with them seems good. But something is troubling you. A note of apology; he knows it bothers Maitimo when he involuntarily leaks emotions through the empathy-bond. Do you want to talk about that? I like to understand what you are feeling and why. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I don't really know why it's bothering me. I've apologized to everybody else. 

 

I got along with my father well before everything happened, it's Melkor's work that we don't trust each other, I should want to undo it. But it feels - hard. It wouldn't actually be hard. You have to - overshoot my father's expectations and then he feels gratified and calms right down of his own accord, he's not a very complicated person when it comes to this sort of thing, I will kneel at his feet and tearfully apologize and then he'll tell me there was nothing at all to apologize for and I should stop that at once, and - come home, except I can't go home - and - I don't know what's bothering me, actually.

Permalink Mark Unread

I would definitely have some feelings about it, in your place! He said some very cruel things to you, even if it was - very provoked - and, I am not sure, if it were me in that position, it would bother me that I needed to - manage him, even manipulate him, into forgiveness, rather than simply being open. Though we are very different people so I am not sure if it is like that for you. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He didn't say anything to me. I didn't learn he'd disowned me until you mentioned it, though it wasn't a surprise. 



Permalink Mark Unread

Oh, I had thought - I suppose Vanyel was not quite clear about what happened where or in what order, and I was not even there. Did he try to hit you? 

Permalink Mark Unread

Yes. And then the Valar asked Eru for advice, and then I was - sent to you - and when I woke up you mentioned, that he'd said it was no concern of his. It hadn't been a surprise and it hadn't mattered very much, the only things Telumë was restrained from by fears of diplomatic interference were things that Maitimo could've refused anyway and didn't want to, but - 

Permalink Mark Unread

I think it makes sense to feel wronged by that? And - I suspect it would be difficult to get an apology for it from your father, and instead you are not even trying for that?

Permalink Mark Unread

It is impossible to get an apology for anything from my father and trying would mean - making him double down on it, and also question why I still feel enough affinity with evil Maitimo to want apologies on his behalf.

Permalink Mark Unread

Yes, I agree that trying to obtain an apology from your father is not going to work. But - well, felt it was appropriate to apologize to you on evil Maitimo's behalf, right? And - the fact that your father is not going to actually apologize does not need to mean it would not be meaningful and good if he did. Sigh. It does not really work for me to apologize for him, but - well, you hurt him very badly, and it makes sense to apologize to him for it, but he hurt you as well, in his anger, and my sense is that you do have enough - continuity - with the person you were then to still remember that hurt? 

(Telumë feels like there's something important here that he's trying to convey, and also he has no idea if he's hitting any of the right words.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

It feels like it was me. I was wrong about some stuff and I was in a very bad corner but it was me being wrong and in a corner. And -

- and he was trying, right, he did come as close as he ever does to an apology when he found out about the marriage, he said he wished he'd left Valinor sooner so I didn't have to grow up - believing the Valar - and I heard that and thought 'he feels guilty, I can use that', and did, to get his Silmarils taken away, and it's just kind of stupid to be upset that in so doing I lost...the possibility of having a relationship that had that in it, that sense he would have fought the gods for me.

Permalink Mark Unread

I do not think it is stupid? You - used a lever you had access to, to achieve a goal, and it had a price, and - well, if it were stupid for you to be sad about that, it would have to be stupid for me to be sad that I killed millions of people for Foundation to exist, and...I am sad about that and I do not think it is stupid. I know it is somewhat more complicated because your goals have - shifted, over time - but I do not think that makes it stupider to grieve that you lost something. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I want - 

- I don't know what I want. I don't want to make you relive - all of that - but I can't stop poking it - the moment when I stopped having lots of people love me and want me to live and ended up in the world where I had exactly one -

Permalink Mark Unread

I do not mind talking about it. It still aches, but there's relief there as well. I think it is not quite true that you had only one such person. Nerdanel still loved you and wished you to live. She asked after you. And Findekáno - I mean, I think he thought it was a risk and one that was hard to justify strategically, keeping you alive, but he wanted it. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Can you hold me?

Permalink Mark Unread

Yes, of course. Hug. I love you. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I love you. Scaredsadwant - I don't want to ask too much. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I am not sure it is possible for you to ask too much. Some sort of distant echo, there; he thinks maybe Maitimo said something similar to him, when he was Leareth. I suppose you might ask things that were - very hard for me, that might take a long time, if I needed to grow first to be able to give you that - but it would not be because it was too much, if that makes sense? You need the things you need. And I wish you to have everything you need, eventually, because I love you. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Lean. I appreciate that. And yet I am scared that if I try to figure out what I want, here, now, it'll end up being something that it is much better for you not to worry you'll ever be expected to give me.

Permalink Mark Unread

That makes sense. He holds Maitimo in silence for a bit, just thinking.

I think we ought to talk about it anyway, he goes on, eventually. And if we figure out what you want, but it does not make sense for you to want it from me, then - that is all right, and we can figure it out together as well. Sigh. I know I cannot give you back a past where those events did not happen. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I don't even really wish for that, now. Just -

Lean. 

He'd been sitting quite still at the seat of the Valar, wondering whether they would kill him. They ought to, obviously, but maybe they were the wrong kinds of entity to do it. But then, they'd done it to orcs, and what difference is there now between orcs and Maitimo. Orcs never come back, so if they do kill him, this is probably it. It feels unfair, somehow, which is ridiculous; he'd been offered so many more chances than any orc. He'd just wished he could have long enough to learn whether the rest of his desperately-strewn plans bore any fruit.  

And then the Valar had asked about the Silmarils. He'd been delighted, delighted and horrified, because this was an important victory and also ones whose costs he hadn't already paid, whose costs he would pay right here and now and - in a fashion that fractured the alliance, ideally - his father had asked him, did you do this, and he'd responded by taunting him, and his father had thrown a punch and the Valar had cancelled magic and he'd stood up, clearheaded, thinking that the thing to do now was to go for Vanyel - and once that proved impossible, to watch his mother try to calm his father down - his mother, his father, relationships he'd pushed to their breaking point, relationships that were not really supposed to have a breaking point - but he can see it in Fëanáro's eyes, that he's reached one - 

- and then he is Telumë's, trying to catch the complicated feelings off Telumë's stern blank face - "Your father - did not wish to express any preferences about your treatment." - had his father known how that would come across, of course not, he was a Quendi, and a particularly imaginative one only along a few dimensions - 

Permalink Mark Unread

He was sort of saying that he did not care if I - raped you, or mistreated you in other ways, is that it? I think he was not considering how that would come across, no - I think he was mostly communicating that he would not cause a diplomatic fuss if we killed you - but I was not there when he said that and so I am not sure. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He was angry, he wasn't phrasing things carefully, I don't want to - infer anything about what he wanted from what he said. I think he had to - he had to stop thinking of me as his son, in order to stop obstructing measures that were at that point very obviously necessary. The diplomatic complications were making things worse. So - stop living in the world where they're real. I guess some people find it easier to hurt people they love and some find it easier to stop loving people they need to hurt - I am not sure if I'm making any sense - 

- the thing he apparently wants is for Telumë to hurt him but this is a stupid want and they definitely should not do it, he has no idea where it even came from -

Permalink Mark Unread

(Telumë is also confused by that want, but he's not going to acknowledge it right now, if they're going to talk about it it seems better for that to happen later, maybe much later.) 

Do you wish your father had done it the other way? Gone on thinking of you as his son, and - accepted the pain it caused him, knowing that it was strategically necessary to imprison or kill you? It's a mental move he's not sure Fëanáro could have made; the man is brilliant, but - unsophisticated, in some ways, there's a way that he thinks in absolutes, and family was one of those...

Permalink Mark Unread

There is not generally any point in wishing my father was a different kind of person whose mind worked different ways. We needed - Fëanáro, the way he was, in order to - decide the best plan was to build your god before you were even back, to start working out how to do it - in order to have gotten the Noldor out of Valinor -

Permalink Mark Unread

I think that is true. If for some reason I had the option to go back and change the past, but could only change Fëanáro's personality, I would not do so. Still. There is something I think you said to me once... I do not recall the context, I think it was in my notes somewhere, but - I was talking about only wanting things that were possible, that wanting impossible things put too much weight on what 'wanting' even means, and - you said that restricting myself to wanting only possible things was letting reality put too much weight on what 'wanting' means. So... I do not think it is inconsistent, to wish that somehow both things could have been true, even if we cannot change the world to be that way. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Nod. 

 

I'll go apologize to him. Squeeze. This still feels complicated but not ridiculously upsetting.

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë leans in and kisses Maitimo's forehead. Good skill. I will still be here if you need to talk afterward... I suppose I am not sure if he will want to see me as well, at some point. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Probably. He likes you.

Permalink Mark Unread

He laughs. For some strange reason, I think he does. Where is he now? 

Permalink Mark Unread

Vinyamar. My mother said they'd visit if we thought it was a good idea.

Permalink Mark Unread

Well, on my end I would like to see both of them. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Then why don't you extend an invitation, and I will let my mother know I'll be there too, and I will compose my apology and figure out how to manage it and then we can show them around.

Permalink Mark Unread

Then Telumë will take his time writing up a nice letter with the invitation, and copying it onto good paper with his best calligraphy (it's not nearly competitive with Quendi calligraphy but this feels important to do himself), and then he sends it with the next regular mail exchange to Arda, along with anything that Maitimo wants to include for Nerdanel. 

Permalink Mark Unread

And they write back almost immediately, to schedule a visit.

Permalink Mark Unread

A week from now would be perfect; that way Telumë can arrange to be all caught up on routine business, and have lots of free time to show them around. (And Maitimo can plan out his apology.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

They will plan on it!

Permalink Mark Unread

Maitimo has a moody week. It's mostly not planning the apology, that takes about ten minutes. He thinks of some of it as 'giving the apology without sending Telumë something worrying over the marriage bond' but that's not quite it either.

He spends a lot of time worrying over his hair. Whether or not to do a married braid, whether or not to do a Noldorin one. He settles eventually on a style that wouldn't be out of place at home but that would never have fit with the circlet he used to wear. Not a married braid, though that's mostly for practical reasons; Telumë doesn't in fact know hundreds of different Quendi hairstyles and cannot do them for him. He might teach him one or two, someday, but not for this. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë is trying to get himself emotionally prepared so that he won't be too distressed by whatever he might feel from Maitimo; in a certain sense it feels like it's not his business. 

The day that Fëanáro and Nerdanel are scheduled to arrive, he does ask Maitimo for advice on how to wear his own hair; he's been keeping it braided out of habit, even during the period where there weren't any Quendi around in his city, but he's still doing the toddler braid style and possibly at some point should learn a more complicated one. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Maitimo can do it for him; like a King, if he wishes that, or like a researcher if that's closer to the presentation he wants.

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë prefers it like a researcher, he decides. He doesn't really think of himself as a King. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Then Maitimo will do it for him, in the space of about five minutes because most of the Tirion researcher fashions are not ones that take a lot of time. It's a married braid, of course, but very subtly.  When he is done he kisses Telumë.

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë kisses him back, and then they can go out and greet Fëanáro and Nerdanel together when they arrive via the Gate-terminus. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Fëanáro looks - slightly surprised, to see Maitimo, but copes by studiously ignoring him. He congratulates Telumë on the city, on the god - can they talk to the god themselves -

Permalink Mark Unread

They can! Foundation is strongest here and they should just be able to talk to them with osanwe, although it’s a little unintuitive the first time. Foundation knows how to respect the public/private thoughts distinction at this point, too.

Permalink Mark Unread

Fëanáro is suddenly deeply distracted talking about physics and engineering with Foundation. Occasionally he delightedly tells Nerdanel that he was right about some technical point about the makeup of the air or what makes something a metal.

Permalink Mark Unread

"How are you two doing?"

Permalink Mark Unread

"We're very happy. The city's beautiful."

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë meets her eyes, suddenly feeling oddly self-conscious and unsure what he’s supposed to say. “Things are going well in the city, and the country more generally. I am pleased to have Maitimo’s help with it. And - very happy that we are together.”

Permalink Mark Unread

"We are very fortunate that he had somewhere to go. - I talked to the Valar about whether, in light of circumstances having changed so much, the Outer Lands might make their own decision as to the duration of his exile. They're - considering it."

Permalink Mark Unread

"It's not their authority," Fëanáro says distractedly. "He could just show up and let Turukáno decide whether to kick him out - and he'll decide not to - Eonwë is not going to personally show up to enforce it."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Is Turukáno still King, then."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Well, I'm not going to rule a city on some stupid gods-bothered planet where I can't have my Silmarils and where they claim authority over whether I can have my children."

Permalink Mark Unread

- Maitimo blinks at him, startled.

Permalink Mark Unread

"-I haven't decided yet what I think of you but I certainly don't expect the Valar's opinions to improve matters! No, we'll found a Noldorin city here, assuming you'll have us and assuming Treven will give me the Silmarils back."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Treven will be delighted to return the Silmarils," Telumë says, after a moment spend finding his balance. "He knows Valdemar is not in a position to make good use of them. And I can speak only for the north, but - yes, of course we will have you, and there is plenty of empty land here, if you are willing to accept the cold climate and needing weather-barrier domes. You could also speak to Treven about building a city in Valdemar, if you prefer." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I should talk to Foundation and make sure he's satisfactory before we set up within his remit but I don't think we'll mind the cold. What do you think of him," he says to Maitimo.

Permalink Mark Unread

"Of Foundation? I think he is substantially more competent and decent than the Valar though it would not surprise me if you were to eventually find yourself chafing at living under any god, even one who actually knows better than you and is smarter than you. - maybe especially that."

Permalink Mark Unread

"I mean, if he were uniformly smarter than me I wouldn't want to live under him, I'd be - redundant. I want to be somewhere where I'm thinking of things that haven't already been thought of. But - that's not quite how Velgarth gods are, right, he can mostly only see what we are ourselves inventing and doing, even if he sees it before we do."

Permalink Mark Unread

"I would not particularly expect you to be redundant."

Permalink Mark Unread

"I agree. I think Foundation would find your presence here of great value, actually, he benefits hugely from more clever people studying fields and inventing things here, especially if those people are willing to talk to him." Telumë doesn't particularly think of his god as male, but he usually follows other people's lead when they're discussing it, to avoid confusion. "You ought to make your own decision on it, though, and I am not in any particular rush for it. We can retrieve the Silmarils first, you need not have decided already." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I don't think I will, yet. It's not urgent, so long as -"

Permalink Mark Unread

 

"So long as Maitimo has somewhere to go," Nerdanel finishes the sentence for him when he doesn't seem inclined to.

Permalink Mark Unread

"I lived in Rethwellan, while I was deciding whether I wanted to be married. For about the ordinary length of a Valian engagement, really, though I admit it's traditional to do it before the marriage."

Permalink Mark Unread

 

"Is he evil?" he asks Telumë.

Permalink Mark Unread

If not for Foundation, Telumë might not be able to answer so instantly or confidently, but, in fact, Foundation exists, so: "No." Fond look in Maitimo's direction. "He is not exactly the same as before; there are some areas where he still holds opinions comparable to Sauron's, but, well, Sauron was not wrong about everything." 

He resists the urge to add that he, too, would be considered kind of evil by a lot of commonly-held moral systems; he understands the desire to do that, to try to preempt people being shocked and betrayed at what he's been willing to do, but - it doesn't really help, anymore, to constantly give that disclaimer. "Anyway, by my value system - and I expect by yours - he is not at this point evil. You will notice that I am not at all concerned about having him in my city, helping me build its future." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I had noticed that but I knew you to have poor judgment around him, so."

Permalink Mark Unread

 

"I'm sorry," he says quietly. "I betrayed you, and I specifically misused - your inclination to try to decide whether I could be worthy of your trust again - and I did it to hopefully kill an extra couple hundred thousand people by ensuring the Silmarils were in the hands of the Valar. I don't know how to fix that, but it did not take me long to throw away every part of me that was willing to have done it."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Oh, I'm not mad about that. You were evil, of course you were going to do evil things. My complaint here is that my son, who was not evil, went several hundred Years not telling us that he was capable of this sort of thing. Why not?"

Permalink Mark Unread

"Oh. Uh -"

Permalink Mark Unread

Permalink Mark Unread

A lot of conflicting feelings VERY LOUDLY and then - 

"I tried, for a while, when I was little and didn't know how to want anything other than your approval. And then I got older, and I wanted things you might not like, and so it didn't suit me, for you to have the measure of me closely enough to notice if any of it was pointed in some other direction. I guess you could conceive of that as thousands of years of betrayal, if you wanted. But you always had most of me - as much as you needed -"

Permalink Mark Unread

"Did I."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Yes. I had set everything else aside, by the time Leareth arrived, to pursue your stupid feud. I loved a man - I didn't tell you - for a thousand years, and I had a plan to kill him, if you picked that fight, and it looked like you were going to."

Permalink Mark Unread

" - you could have told me there was someone in particular not to pick a fight with, I wouldn't have begrudged you -"

Permalink Mark Unread

"Findekáno."

Permalink Mark Unread

" - I guess I would absolutely have begrudged you Findekáno - why - he does not have any good qualities -"

Permalink Mark Unread

"I am aware that you think so."

Permalink Mark Unread

 

"You sacrificed me thinking you were an interesting person for him?"

Permalink Mark Unread

"What if I did? But - not just that - I wanted to be able to do things, even if I didn't know yet what the things would turn out to be, and eventually an interworld visitor came to feature in them, which I couldn't possibly have guessed - and I didn't want to spend all my time and energy making you understand something you didn't want to know."

Permalink Mark Unread

 

"I guess you couldn't have just demonstrated it by murdering twelve people while under constant supervision."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Would've have known how, anyway. Got it off him." He glances at Telumë.

Permalink Mark Unread

" - you - he - Nolofinwë's son -"

Permalink Mark Unread

"Technically the Valar only said a man must not take two wives and I don't ever expect to do that."

Permalink Mark Unread

 

 

 

 

"Huh. - how did you notice that he was an interesting person," he asks Telumë.

Permalink Mark Unread

Do you mind if I tell him the honest answer, which is that I read your thoughts? Telumë quickly asks Maitimo. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Go ahead. Apparently we're just - saying things out loud now - sorry - that wasn't what I'd expected to end up doing -

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë takes a step closer to him, lets his hand dangle where Maitimo can take it easily if he wants to. 

"I arrived in an alien world with no idea of what was happening except for the fact that people were pointing swords at each other - swords they were handling very badly - and yelling at each other. And since this was very alarming to me, I - read some people's minds. Maitimo was the first person I encountered who was - hmm, who was oriented, the way I try to be, who knew all the relevant information about what was happening. He spoke my language - not literally, but he understood what I was trying to convey with less cultural translation needed, and he - took it seriously, accepted my advice, provided avenues for me to help. I could offer magic and experience of violence, but I did not understand the Noldor at all, and he did. I am certain that things would have deteriorated into violence long before we could Gate out, if not for his help." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"It's kind of a spectrum, isn't it, between going to parties and running intelligence operations for a country, and running intelligence operations for a country is important."

Permalink Mark Unread

"I don't even know that it's a spectrum. I do one thing and I do it by going to parties and by sending people presents and by writing them letters and by - sending them fake Foresight dreams - I don't do that anymore - okay actually I did once but Foundation thought it was all right -"

Permalink Mark Unread

You did what?? Telumë asks, trying not to betray any surprise in his expression.

"When I arrived, he was doing it by talking to a dozen people at once constantly, whether he was at parties or not," he says out loud to Fëanáro. "Though I imagine the groundwork for it, the fact that he had relationships with all of those people such that he could draw on them then, was done at parties. But there was an extremely impressive feat of social coordination happening there, I did not think it looked possible to gather the thousand initial explorers peacefully and cooperatively but we did and that made such a difference, and he was trying to keep a lookout and warn me of anything suspicious that might indicate Melkor's activities... It was very impressive, is all I can say. He had to learn paranoia from me, but he has a skill with people that I lack." Fondly. 

Permalink Mark Unread

In Rethwellan. They would have been really good for each other and both of them were deeply in denial about it - I said to Foundation, it'll be good for them, they'll endorse it if I ask in a year, are you going to smite me - 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Well. It is a good thing we had both of you. And a good thing Telumë knew what you were capable of - though we would've taken him more seriously if he hadn't married you -"

Permalink Mark Unread

"We should have told people about the marriage sooner so the timing didn't look so suspect."

Permalink Mark Unread

His father looks confused. "It's not that it looked suspect it's that a lot of mind control was involved."

Permalink Mark Unread

"No," Maitimo says firmly. "It's my marriage and I decide how it happened and we got married before the war, accidentally, it only came out during."

Permalink Mark Unread

 

" - okay, I respect the thing you do but that doesn't mean I'm just going to let you get away with doing it at actual facts about reality that have a truth of the matter!"

Permalink Mark Unread

"Well, you can shut up about it, or you can say things such as 'they should've told us sooner so the timing didn't look so suspect' about it, which give me some room to maneuver, or you can say that I told you that we married before the war, which is true, I did tell you that, but you may not bring it up if you're going to say anything else about it. This is important to me."

Permalink Mark Unread

 

"Lying to people is an act of sabotage; you shouldn't do it where you wouldn't also deshoe their horse."

Permalink Mark Unread

"I feel like I actually went to considerable lengths to establish my willingness to deshoe all your horses."

Permalink Mark Unread

 

 

 

"So your plan is - to stay here with Telumë, talk to lots of people - do we get any grandchildren -"

Permalink Mark Unread

He relaxes slightly. Squeezes Telumë's hand. "Not for a long time. But - someday, I think so."

Permalink Mark Unread

"And should we have a party - I haven't had time to make you presents, I was dead -"

Permalink Mark Unread

"I know. I wasn't expecting presents."

Permalink Mark Unread

"I did spend a couple of decades in the Halls working out the formulae for some artifacts I wanted to make, once Mandos explained that he was doing time-compression so we'd all get out at about the same point however long it took us to heal. But I don't have my notes so I'll need some time to rework them and some time more to actually build them."

Permalink Mark Unread

" - okay."

Permalink Mark Unread

"And I have no idea what would even be a good wedding present for Findekáno, what with his lack of a personality."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Well I am not planning to get married again anytime soon, I don't think I have it down quite yet."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Hmm."

Permalink Mark Unread

"But, you know, should that day come, I think it'd mean a lot to him if you'd tell him he was family."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Well, he would be. By marriage. That's - how marriage works. Though maybe we'll have to reconsider that at some number of husbands, if you want forty."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Absolutely not. I have learned my lesson about complicating my romantic life and will stop at two."

Permalink Mark Unread

"And I don't know if it's transitive - if Telumë marries someone else I am unprepared to venture a theory about whether they'd be a Fëanorian or not."

Permalink Mark Unread

"He married lots of people long ago so I am trying to have expectations there might be some awkwardness eventually. ...he loves me more, though."

Permalink Mark Unread

"I should hope so!"

Permalink Mark Unread

"I do." Telumë takes a step closer to Maitimo so he can lean his head against his husband's shoulder, finds himself smiling. "Fëanáro, do you remember the advice you gave me a long time ago, about marriage, and the importance of finding a partner with common sense if you yourself have only the uncommon kind? Well, I think Maitimo and I are both more the uncommon sense type, though at least we have different kinds so it covers the gaps a little. Findekáno, however, has common sense in spades, which is why I cannot possibly object to my husband marrying him too, since it is at this point the only way for him to follow your very good advice. I suppose you can decide whether or not common sense counts as a personality and what it would indicate about wedding presents." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I guess it's a little bit of a personality trait? A boring one, though.

 

I will acknowledge he has good taste."

Permalink Mark Unread

- Maitimo steps forward and gives his father a hug. Neither of them move for a long time.

Permalink Mark Unread

Awwwwwww that seems like a pretty good outcome here, all things considered.

He glances over at Nerdanel. That was not really the conversation I was expecting to have first thing upon your arrival here. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I was not sure whether it would be a good idea or not! We spent a long time with Mandos, discussing things. Maybe it was helpful. Are you all right? It sounds like Maitimo has figured out how to structure everything in a way he feels good about, and I'm glad of that, but marriages do take two people.

Permalink Mark Unread

...That's a good question. 

Yes. It is - not uncomplicated, I think there are still some things that I need to work through, and - I will always wish it had happened a better way, but I am very happy to be married to him. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I'm glad of that. Hug?

Permalink Mark Unread

Hug!

...He has a mother-in-law. Also a father-in-law. That's such an odd thought. He literally cannot remember ever having something that close to parents. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Afterwards everyone seems worn out on emotionally fraught conversations and the Quendi are content to tour his city and be impressed and make plans for a belated wedding party, in a year or so once they've had time to make the presents. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë shows off all their new construction, he's very proud of the city and he knows Maitimo is too, and then he can drop them off at the guest-house set up for them. 

Do you want to come over, he asks Maitimo. If you would prefer some time alone that is also fine. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I'll come over. And he does, quite quickly. - I did not expect that conversation. Maybe Mandos is not totally atrocious at his job.

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë holds out his arms as soon as Maitimo arrives. I was not expecting it either! It seemed - good, at the end. But it must have been very stressful during. Your father is so, he stumbles over and rejects half a dozen adjectives, incredibly himself. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He really is. He likes you, though. Hug. I think - I think if I hadn't lost everything already I wouldn't've had the courage to say any of that.

Permalink Mark Unread

That makes sense. I think it was very good that you said it, though. I - am proud of you. He hopes that isn't going to come across as condescending, he doesn't mean it that way at all. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I am glad I said it. Hug. 

 

My mother says I should keep in mind that you lost a lot of things too and might be inclined to less assertiveness about needing them.

Permalink Mark Unread

She asked me if I was doing all right, it was very kind of her. I - hmm. I think it is hard for me to figure out what I need in general, in the context of relationships, because - I tried not to need anything at all for such a long time. That still feels like a bigger piece than - any of the specifics of what happened between us, before. I am not sure, though. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Nod. Hug. 

Well. All the time in the world.

Permalink Mark Unread

Telumë rests his head on Maitimo's shoulder. I love you so much. Also, it is a very weird thought that your parents think I am part of your family now! I do not think I have ever truly had that before. Certainly not in a way that I expected I could hold onto...

Permalink Mark Unread

You were so lonely when I met you. Vanyel commented on it too. - and Urtho, too, actually, in those notes -

It is - really nice, to see that start to change. I cannot promise my parents are the best at parenting but they'll have a good try.

Permalink Mark Unread

I like them both! That seems like a good start. 

Permalink Mark Unread

And they like you! Flash of complicated feelings, again.

Permalink Mark Unread

There are probably going to be complicated feelings for a long time. Telumë lets it pass and just hugs his husband, then stretches up on tiptoe to kiss him. Thinks for a moment. Right now, I would like it if you carried me to my bedroom. And then I suppose you can do what you feel like from there.